JP6850957B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, it is determined by the player. Regarding a game machine that generates a special game that gives the game value of.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). ) Is variablely displayed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened is set.

In such a game machine, the start memory, which is the right to execute the variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit number, can be stored based on the start winning, and the variable display game is executed based on the start memory. In addition, a start memory display indicating the existence of the start memory is displayed for the player. Then, a game machine that hides the start memory display according to the progress of the game has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-148192

By hiding the start memory display, the area for displaying the effect is increased, which improves the interest, but during that period, the player cannot grasp the status of the start memory, and the start memory corresponding to the start prize is obtained. There was an inconvenience for the player, such as not being able to confirm whether or not the occurrence was occurring. An object of the present invention is to prevent inconvenience for the player.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
Based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area, a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In a game machine that generates a special game to be granted
A display device that can display information about the game,
A start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of execution rights of the variable display game as start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area.
A start storage display means capable of displaying a first hold display and a second hold display indicating information about the start memory stored in the start storage means on the display device, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to change the display mode of the first hold display to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode is provided.
The start memory display means continuously displays the second hold display during the execution of the variable display game, and executes the first hold display intermittently and a plurality of times to execute a predetermined specific effect. Configured to hide inside,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect that starts after a specific period in which the first specific effect is completed and the first hold display is redisplayed.
Said first hold display of a display mode corresponding to the new start memory occurring in the specific period can be displayed the first hold display is the second specific effect is completed following the variable display game is executed At that time, the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the specific display mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of a batch display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of an information display device. It is a figure explaining the detail of the production operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining a hit probability and a hit type. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the end process per normal figure, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the normal process transition setting process 2 for the normal figure. It is a figure explaining an example of the display in a display device. It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a figure explaining an example of production. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a figure explaining the scenario management registration address area and the motion management registration address area. It is a flowchart explaining one-shot command processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a hold information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process in the 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during display of a general drawing in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot system command processing in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the general drawing information setting process in 7th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in 8th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in 8th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge 13. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, above the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a payout abnormality are provided. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 having a built-in lamp or the like to emit light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. There is. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are arranged. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect operation unit 700 that receives an operation input from the player. The effect operation unit 700 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a press operation input from the player, and further, the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is in contact with the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. A key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card are ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to move the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect operation unit 700, the player performs an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can be done.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 forming the first display device is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), an EL (EL display), and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 has a square columnar shape and can rotate around an axis along the length direction.

Further, a sub display device 49 forming a second display device is provided inside the recess of the center case 40 and below the display device 41. The sub-display device 49 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), an EL (EL display), and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information about the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. Further, the sub-display device 49 forms one of the board effect devices 44 that produce a game effect by operating, and operates upward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2 to the front surface of the display device 41. It is possible to be in an overlapping state.

On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7). Further, a general winning opening 35 is arranged on the left side and the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

Further, on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a movable member on the game area 32 side, and the movable member becomes almost vertical depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, and the large winning opening is closed (player). A game ball tilting to the left and flowing down the game area 32 is converted into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted.

That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by a movable member driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). ) During the medium or small hit game state (second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, allowing the player to play. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the game machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and the second special figure changing display that give the start conditions of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) are given. A winning device 90 is provided, which includes a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 (see FIG. 6). .. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is the starting opening 2 switch 97a that forms the starting opening 2 switch 1 (FIG. 7). See).

Further, on the left side of the winning device 90, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. ing. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode (specific result), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a game ball by the normal variable winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 7) as a driving device. It can be changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous for the player) that makes it easy for the player to flow in. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7) forming the starting port 2 switch 2. Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

FIG. 3 shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the winning device 90. As shown in FIG. 3A, a distribution member 92 is provided inside the winning device 90 at a position directly below the inflow port 91. Further, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at the lower left of the distribution member 92, and the second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the distribution member. Further, a cover member 93 is provided so as to cover the front of the distribution member 92, the first starting winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97. The cover member 93 is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distribution member 92 is an inverted T-shaped member that can rotate about a rotation shaft 92a along the front-rear direction. Of the three arms extending from the position where the rotation shaft 92a is arranged, on the left side of the arm portion 92b extending upward, there is an arm portion 92c extending to the left adjacent to the arm portion 92b. A first holding portion 92e for temporarily holding the game ball is formed, and on the right side of the arm portion 92b extending upward, an arm portion 92d extending to the right adjacent to the arm portion 92b is formed. A second holding portion 92f for temporarily holding the game ball is formed. The distribution member 92 can accept the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 by the first holding portion 92e as shown in FIG. 3A, with the arm portion 92b extending upward always facing upward. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 3B, the second holding portion 92f can rotate between the above position and the position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 91 can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first holding portion 92e is in a position capable of receiving the game ball flowing into the inflow port 91, the second holding portion 92f moves the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 97. Will be in a state of flowing down. Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the second holding portion 92f is in a position where the game ball flowing into the inflow port 91 can be received, the first holding portion 92e faces the first starting winning opening 36. The game ball is in a state of flowing down.

Further, the arm portion 92b extending upward is provided with a first magnet 92g, and the winning device 90 facing the first magnet 92g when the arm portion 92b extending upward becomes vertical. A second magnet 94 is provided on the rear wall. The poles on the opposite sides of the first magnet 92g and the second magnet 94 are set to be the same pole, and the left and right arms 92b extending upward due to the repulsive force do not stay in a vertical state. It is designed to be urged to rotate to any of the above. As a result, when the rotation of the distribution member 92 is stopped, either the first holding portion 92e or the second holding portion 92f is in a state where it can always accept the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91.

In such a winning device 90, as shown in FIG. 3B, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 can be accepted toward the inflow port 91 of the first holding portion 92e and the second holding portion 92f. It is held by one of the holding parts in the state. When the game ball is held by one of the holding portions, the distribution member 92 rotates in the direction of the holding portion due to the weight of the game ball, and the held game ball is in the direction in which the holding portion rotates. It flows down toward the 1 start winning opening 36 or the 2nd starting winning opening 97.

That is, as shown in FIG. 3A, when the game ball that has flowed in by the first holding portion 92e is received, the distribution member 92 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball and enters the first start winning opening 36. Then, as shown in FIG. 3B, the second holding unit 92f stops in a state in which the next game ball can be accepted. Then, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in by the second holding portion 92f is received, the distribution member 92 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball and goes to the second start winning opening 97. Then, as shown in FIG. 3A, the first holding unit 92e stops in a state in which the next game ball can be accepted.

The game ball that has flowed down from the holding portion is likely to flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97, but may not flow in, and if it does not flow in, it flows out of the winning device 90. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portion is strong, there is a high possibility that the flow will not flow into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 97. In addition, you may be configured to always win a prize in any of the starting winning openings.

Further, as the distribution member 92 rotates, the other holding portion, which is not the holding portion in which the game ball is held, becomes acceptable toward the inflow port 91. Then, the next accepted game ball is guided to the winning opening on the other holding portion side. As a result, the game balls that sequentially flow into the inflow port 91 are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97.

Further, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided on the left side of the winning device 90 so that a game ball that has not won the first starting winning opening 36 may win the normal variable winning device 37. ing. Further, a general winning opening 35 is provided on the right side of the winning device 90 so that a game ball that has not won the second starting winning opening 97 may win the general winning opening 35. .. Further, at a position on the left side of the winning device 90 and above the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down from the left side of the normal variable winning device 37 is directed toward the normal variable winning device 37. A guide portion 98 is provided to be changed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure variation display game, the second special figure variation display game, and the general case, which form a special figure variation display game. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal figure variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start gate 34 and displaying various information is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. ) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display (2nd special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation display for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of the LED lamp. Units (general map display) 53 (D8, D10, D18) and storage display units 54, 55, 56 (D11 to D16) for notifying the start memory number of each variation display game, which is also composed of LED lamps. Be prepared.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 (D17), which lights up when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the game machine 10. Third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 59 (D9) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power is turned on, and the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot ( A round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed is provided. In addition, the batch display device 50 is further notified of a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of a big hit, and that a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a left-handed game state. A display unit (right-handed notification unit) or the like may be provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment display in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also blinking and driven to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) is turned on as the hit result mode (special result mode), and the game result is displayed.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, of the lamps D8, the lamps D10, and the lamps D18 constituting the normal figure display 53, only the lamp D8 is turned on when the result of the game is out of order. When the game result is a hit and the hit stop symbol number is "1", only the lamp D10 is lit, and when the game result is a hit and the hit stop symbol number is "2", only the lamp D18 is lit. When the result of the game is a hit and the stop symbol number is "3", the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are configured to be lit.

Further, the normal figure hold indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (d), of the lamps D15 and the lamps D16 constituting the normal figure holding indicator 56, when the number of holdings is "0", both the lamps D15 and the lamps D16 are used. When the number of holds is "1", only the lamp D15 is turned on, when the number of holds is "2", both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on, and when the number of holds is "3". Is configured to make the lamp D15 blink and the lamp D16 to be lit, and when the number of hold is "4", both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are blinking.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 determines the number of special figure 1 start memories (special figure 1 hold, first start memory) which are the execution rights of the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on multiple LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, among the lamps D11 and the lamps D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, when the special figure 1 start storage number is “0”, the lamps D11 and Both the lamp D12 are turned off, only the lamp D11 is turned on when the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", and both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on when the special figure 1 start memory number is "2". When the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp D11 is blinked and the lamp D12 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "4", the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. It is configured to make both of them blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 determines the number of special figure 2 start memories (special figure 2 hold, second start memory) which are the execution rights of the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. , Display by turning off, blinking, and turning on multiple LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), among the lamps D13 and the lamps D14 constituting the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, when the special figure 2 start storage number is “0”, the lamps D13 and Both the lamp D14 are turned off, only the lamp D13 is turned on when the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", and both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on when the special figure 2 start memory number is "2". When the special figure 2 start memory number is "3", the lamp D13 is blinked and the lamp D14 is turned on, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. It is configured to make both of them blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, in the case of a normal gaming state in which the time reduction state does not occur (variation time reduction). When the function is not operating), the lamp is turned off, and when a time saving state occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (f), the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (normally) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. In the case of the probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when the special game state based on the big hit is not performed, and the number of rounds selected according to the special result is supported during the special game state. Turn on the lamp. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), when the number of selected rounds is "16" among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 60, the lamps D5 to D7 are turned on. When the number of selected rounds is "8", the lamps D4 to D6 are lit, and when the number of selected rounds is "2", the lamps D3 are lit. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the upper left portion of the center case 40, a display of a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variable display game separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the display device 41 and a start memory are displayed. An information display device 800 for displaying a number is provided.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the information display device 800 is composed of six LEDs L1 to L6 arranged in a row. As shown in FIG. 5B, L1 is a special figure 1 fourth symbol LED for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. Further, L2 is a special figure 2 fourth symbol LED for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. Further, L3 and L4 are special figure 1 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the special figure 1 start memory number, and L5 and L6 are special figure 2 hold LEDs 1 and 2 for displaying the special figure 2 start memory number.

As shown in FIG. 5C, in L1 and L2, the LED blinks to indicate that the special figure variation display game is changing during the change, and the game is accompanied by the end of the special figure variation display game. The game result is displayed as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of. In the case of the present embodiment, if it is off, it is turned off, and if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is turned on. In addition, the display mode in the case of a small hit may be a display mode different from that of a missed hit or a big hit. For example, it may be made to blink in a mode different from the blinking during fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (d), L3 and L4 are the special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 hold) which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. The number of LEDs is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 start memory number is "0", both L3 and L4 are turned off, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only L3 is turned on. FIG. 1 When the start memory number is "2", both L3 and L4 are lit, and when the start memory number is "3", L3 is blinked and L4 is lit. When the starting memory number is "4", both L3 and L4 are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5D, L5 and L6 are the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. The number of LEDs is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 start memory number is "0", both L5 and L6 are turned off, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only L5 is turned on. FIG. 2 When the start memory number is "2", both L5 and L6 are lit, and when the start memory number is "3", L5 is blinked and L6 is lit. When the starting memory number is "4", both L5 and L6 are configured to blink. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec.

The brightness of the information display device 800 may be adjusted so as not to affect the game. For example, when the information display device 800 is provided in the vicinity of the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, there arises a problem that it becomes difficult to see the inflowing game ball due to light emission. In order to solve such a problem, the brightness of the information display device 800 may be adjusted. Examples of the brightness adjusting method include a method of lowering the current value flowing through the LED by a resistor, a method of adjusting by software control such as PWM control, and a method of using these in combination.

Since the information display device 800 is provided separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by the display of the fourth symbol, and the display area can be effectively used. When the movable effect member or the like is arranged, the information display device 800 is placed at a position that does not fall within the operating range of the movable effect member so that the information display device 800 is not covered in the process of operation. Deploy. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed by the display device 41 instead of the information display device 800, but in this case, it is displayed at a position not concealed by the effect member, the effect display, or the like so that it can always be visually recognized. In addition, when a movable effect member or the like is arranged, the position does not fall within the operating range of the movable effect member or the display range of the effect display so that the fourth symbol is not covered during the operation process. It is always visible by displaying it or moving it to a position where it does not overlap according to the operation of the movable effect member or the display mode of the effect display.

FIG. 6 shows the details of the effect operation unit 700. FIG. 6A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 700. As shown in FIG. 6A, the effect operation unit 700 of the present embodiment includes an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. Has been done. That is, the effect operation unit 700 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

Then, the sensitivity setting data, the LED brightness data, and the like are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect control unit 700, and the effect button is transmitted from the effect control unit 700 to the effect control board (effect control device) 300. The push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the (push button) 25 and the touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a included in the touch panel 29 are output. It is configured to be.

In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the effect button (push button) 25 is used to press the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 (the operation of pressing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 to push down the effect operation unit 700). ) Is detected. Further, a plurality of points are provided on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700, and the touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a contact operation with respect to the points provided on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B, nine points, "TSW1" to "TSW8" points and "Pa" points, are provided as a plurality of points. More specifically, the "TSW4" point provided in the center of the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700, the "TSW1" point provided on the left side of the "TSW4" point, and the back side (game) from the "TSW4" point. The "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side), the "TSW6" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point, and the "TSW8" provided on the front side (player side) of the "TSW4" point. The points, the "TSW2" point provided between the "TSW1" point and the "TSW3" point, the "TSW5" point provided between the "TSW3" point and the "TSW6" point, and the "TSW6". A "TSW7" point provided between the point and the "TSW8" point and a "Pa" point provided between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point are provided. The number of points is not limited to nine, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6B, for convenience, each point of "TSW1" to "TSW8" is described as "TSW1" to "TSW8", respectively. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

The touch sensor of the touch panel 29 can detect the contact operation at eight points of "TSW1" to "TSW8", and the "Pa" point does not detect the contact operation. Of course, the contact operation may be detected even at the "Pa" point. Further, LEDs (in the case of the present embodiment, full-color LEDs) of independent systems are arranged at each of the nine points of the "TSW1" to "TSW8" points and the "Pa" points.

For the "Pa" point, for example, the LED of the "Pa" point can be used as a notification lamp for one notification, or the LED of each point on the upper surface of the production operation unit 700 is sequentially turned on like a roulette to be the "Pa" point. Can be used for a definite system of production, such as using the LED of the above for the "probability (or probability variation confirmation)" point, and using the LED of the "Pa" point for the pre-reading accuracy production.

Here, the lighting brightness of the LED (specifically, the LED arranged at the "TSW1" to "TSW8" points, the "Pa" point, etc.) for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 is adjusted (hole setting). , Player adjustment) is excluded. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is not affected by the brightness adjustment and is constant. In addition, the touch sensor has a function of forcibly turning off the touch when the touch-on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)) (stops the output of the touch-on signal and touch-offs). It has a function to output a signal). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured so as not to detect continuous contact operations for a predetermined time or longer.

Examples of the player's operation detected by the effect operation unit 700 include the operation shown in FIG. 6 (c). "Single hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 700 once, and "continuous hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 700 a plurality of times at intervals within a predetermined time. “Long press” is an operation of holding down the effect operation unit 700 for a predetermined time or longer, and “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29. "" Pa "operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press" is long when it is in contact with one (or both) of two points, the "Pa" point or the adjacent "TSW1" point and the "TSW8" point. It is a pressing operation, and "flicking" is an operation of sliding the touch panel 29 while touching it so as to play it. Of course, the operations to be detected are not limited to these operations.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning openings is increased according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

On the other hand, in the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided, and the game is played. When the game ball driven into the area 32 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game is hit and a normal change winning device is used. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 when 37 is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal figure start memory number, the normal figure start memory number is added (for example). +1) and one normal figure start memory will be memorized. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit judgment random value is used as the judgment value. The result of the normal map variation display game is determined with reference to. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal-figure variation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 and is displayed by a variable display unit (general-figure display) 53 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normal. Makes identification information (normal pattern, ordinary pattern). It should be noted that the normal figure display 53 is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. in a predetermined time variation, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may. When the stop display of the normal fluctuation display game results in the normal map identification result, the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time as a hit of the normal map. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second start winning opening inside the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switches 37a, 97a, respectively. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as the special figure 1 starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). , The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is used as the special figure 2 starting memory. Is memorized up to the limit. Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). In the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM), each is stored as a special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed at the center. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the case 40 and the information display device 800.

The game control device 100 wins a prize in the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the ordinary variable winning device 37, or based on the starting memory thereof, the special figure 1 display 51 (variable display device) or The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device). The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. In addition, a decorative special figure variable display game for variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is executed on the display device (image display device) 41. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the information display device 800 is also a special result mode. Further, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the small hit result mode, it becomes a small hit and the small hit game state (so-called). , Small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the information display device 800 is also a small hit result mode.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 plays a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure start memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve the interest. Further, in the information display device 800, as described above, the decorative special figure variation display game is executed using L1 and L2.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

Further, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is 0, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening) When the game ball wins in 97 or the normal variable winning device 37), the starting memory is stored with the generation of the starting right, the number of starting memories is added by 1, and the first special feature is immediately based on the starting memory. The figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by 1. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played, and the special figure variation display game ends. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening 97 or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state where the game is not played, a special game state, or a small hit game state, the game starts. If the number of memories is less than the upper limit, the number of start memories is added by 1 and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state). At the end of the small hit game state), the starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switches 37a, 97a in the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, and the gate switch. The 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. (Hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the voltage of DC32V. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. The reach state also includes, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (low probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (short-time operation state (normal operation state) or normal operation state), the number of start-up memories, etc., from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Select and acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, and a normal variable winning device. It is connected to the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a (start port 2 switches 1 and 2) in 37, the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. ing. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement park internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for this is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and an information display device 800. , A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111B. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal figure display, a process of displaying the normal figure variable display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the specific result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal figure display, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated. , The control is performed to generate a hit state in which the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the first special figure variation display is performed based on this starting memory. A random value for determining the jackpot of the game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit or miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 2 switches 37a and 97a provided in the second start winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting memory is memorized based on the starting memory. A random value for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 changes the display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). It serves as a game control means for controlling the progress.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 and the information display device 800 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. At the same time, a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. Control is performed. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the low probability state. Further, regardless of which of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game results in a high probability state, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game and the second special figure. Both variable display games are in a high probability state. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a probability setting means for setting the probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state.

Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 has a time saving state (specific game state, normal drawing high probability state, normal power support state, time saving operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. Also called) can be generated. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state (normal operating state). Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal operating state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2), and the opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) for the third stop symbol. 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power opening number, and the normal power opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to set the probability (normally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, by changing any one or more of the normal map fluctuation time, the normal map stop time, the number of normal power opening times, the normal power opening time, and the normal map probability, the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time. The time to change the state to the open state is extended more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

FIG. 9 shows the probability of winning and the type of hit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. In addition, the probability of a small hit differs between the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. The probability of this small hit does not change regardless of the state of the big hit probability.

FIG. 9B shows the types of hits, the average number of winning balls and the distribution probability for each type of hit. The jackpot types include 16R probability variation A to F, 6R probability variation, and 2R probability variation A and B. In each of the 16R probability variations A to F, the number of rounds that can be executed in the special game state is 16, but the effect contents and the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in each round are different. In addition, the number of rounds that can be executed in the special game state is 2 for each of the 2R probability variations A and B, but the production contents are different.

Further, after the end of the special game state based on the big hit, the high probability state (specific game state) is set for a period until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (80 times in this case). Therefore, all types of jackpots are probabilistic jackpots. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the variable display game is executed in favor of the player for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Of course, it may include a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of 16R probability variation A to F, 6R probability variation, and 2R probability variation A, the normal variation winning device is used for a period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (here, 80 times). The operating state of 37 becomes a time-saving operating state. Further, in the case of the 2R probability variation A, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes the normal operating state after the end of the special gaming state.

The operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in each round includes a long opening and a short opening. In the long opening, the opening time is 29 seconds, and in the short opening, the opening time is 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the more rounds that are open for a long time, the more prize balls will be won. 16R probability variation A, B, F will be open for a long time in any round. Therefore, it is a big hit of 16 rounds (actual 16R). These are different in the content of the production. In addition, the 16R probability variation C has a long opening up to the 12th round and a short opening in the 13th to 16th rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is a big hit (actual 12R) of 12 rounds. In addition, the 16R probability variation D has a long opening up to the 8th round and a short opening in the 9th to 16th rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is a big hit (actual 8R) of 8 rounds. In addition, the 16R probability variation E has a long opening up to the 4th round and a short opening in the 5th to 16th rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is a big hit (actual 4R) of 4 rounds. In addition, the 6R probability variation is long open in any round, and the 2R probability variation A and B are short opening in any round. In the case of a small hit, the short opening of 0.2 seconds is performed twice as in the case of 2R probability variation A and B.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17), and it is normal. If (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 11 and a process is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 11 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 11, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50. The on (lighting) data of the device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, and other commands) If so, send multiple commands such as the recovery screen command). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time (customer waiting demo screen is displayed). For example, (for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as (command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it becomes difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (a large winning opening solenoid 38b, a general electric solenoid 37c) is performed.

When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S105), the random number update process 1 (step S106), and the random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, 97a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S110) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a, 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning device 37, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and the winning is given. Based on special figure variation display The game result pre-judgment is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the game.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, refer to it in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be used is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the operation is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit medium processing. The small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is completed. To do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 1 switch 36a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A106, and subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first start opening (step A103; Y), a table for setting the information on hold by the first start (first start winning opening 36) is displayed. After the preparation (step A104), the special figure start port switch common process (step A105) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A106), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A107) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step A108).

If it is determined in step A108 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A108; N), the process proceeds to step A113, and subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A108 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A108; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variable. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning ball can be won (step A109), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A109; Y), the step The process proceeds to the process of A111, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A109 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A109; N), it is determined whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring (step A110).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A110 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A110; Y), the process proceeds to step A113, and subsequent processes are performed. Further, in step A110, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A110; N), after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the second starting port (normal variation winning device 37) (step A111). , The special figure start port switch common process (step A112) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A113, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A113), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A114) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, start port 2 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is reached. Set the information indicating that there was a prize. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the third start opening (second start winning opening 97) (step A115).

If it is determined in step A115 that there is no winning in the third starting port (step A115; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A115 that there is a prize in the third start opening (step A115; Y), a table for setting the information on hold by the third start (second start winning opening 97) is displayed. After the preparation (step A116), the special figure start port switch common process (step A117) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A105, A112, A117) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a, 97a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is provided to the gaming machine. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 10, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A132). Step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). ). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102 and A107 is used as the jackpot of RWM. Save in the random number storage area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A144), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A145) is performed.
Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A146), and the effect command setting process (step A147) is performed to perform the special figure start port switch common process. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory that is the execution right of the variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) first starts the various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area (first start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. A predetermined number of various random value values that are stored as a memory (special figure 1 start memory) and extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning area (second start winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37) are stored. It is stored in the upper limit as the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory).

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A145) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a jackpot determination process (step A151) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A152; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A153), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is supported. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A160.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A152; N), the small hit determination process (step A155) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A156; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A159), and the process proceeds to the process of step A160.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A156; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A157), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 is provided. It is acquired (step A158), and the process proceeds to step A160.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A160), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A161). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A162) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A163).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A165), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A162 and the variation pattern setting process in step A163 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is displayed as the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 earlier, and in particular, the player may change the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to notify the result-related information to.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the large winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A201). .. If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (step). A202).
If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the processing is being performed during the small hit (step A203). ).
If the processing during the small hit is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to the processing of step A205.
Then, "0" is set in the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 1 (one of the large winning opening switches 38a) (step A206).

When there is no input in the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input in the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 38a) (step A210). When there is an input to the large winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), the large winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 38a) (step A210).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), the large winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed. It is determined whether it is inside (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of large winning openings (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of large winning openings counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step). A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A219). Step A220), it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221). When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed, and when the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number, which is the sum of the special figure 1 start memory number and the special figure 2 start memory number, is 0 (step A301). .. That is, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory.

When the number of special figure reservations is not 0 (step A301; N), that is, when there is a start memory, it is determined whether the start memory to be processed this time is special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) (step). A302).
In the game machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, so that the start memory to be processed this time, which is the start memory for starting the special figure variation display game from now on, is special. It is determined whether it is the start memory of FIG. 1 or the start memory of the special figure 2, and the corresponding special figure variation display game is processed.

When the start memory to be processed this time is the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) (step A302; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A303) is performed to correspond to the special figure 1 hold number. The decoration special figure hold number command to be performed is prepared (step A304), and the effect command setting process (step A305) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A306) of the special figure 1 is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

On the other hand, if the start memory to be processed this time is not the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) (step A302; N), that is, the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory), the special figure 2 The variation start process (step A307) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A308), and the effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

Further, when the number of reserved special figures is 0 (step A301; Y), that is, when there is no start memory, it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not started. In the case (step A311; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).
Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), the effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A303) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. The process of setting the missed information and the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the display game is a big hit, and the small for determining whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed, in which the hit flag is set with the misalignment information and the small hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended as a target.

As shown in FIG. 20, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. The process of setting the missed information and the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the display game is a big hit, and the small for determining whether the second special figure variation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed, in which the hit flag is set with the misalignment information and the small hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

Information regarding the start of the special figure fluctuation display game is set by these special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Further, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning area (first starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning area (first starting winning area (first)). 2 The variable display game execution means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the starting winning opening 97 and the normal variable winning device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about the pattern and a stop information command including information about the extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time.
Next, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed to end the special figure display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that it is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708). The upper limit table of the number of rounds is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). When it is determined that A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (16, 8 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM rounds are obtained. Save in the number upper limit value area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step). A717) is performed.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games in the high probability state (step A725; Y). Step A726), the effect mode information check process (step A727) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed.

Then, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation number update process for managing the number of special figure variation display games in the high probability state. (Step A735), the effect mode information check process (step A736) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining switch preparation It is determined whether or not the rotation speed matches (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Performs the effect command setting process (step A903).

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A907). The process transition setting process (step A909) is performed while the large winning opening is open, and the fanfare / interval process is completed.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A908). , The process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, when it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the game state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).

When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). The interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening is being opened. End the process.

If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step). A1006), the interval command is prepared (step A1007), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. To do.

On the other hand, in the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. The ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the time is prepared (step A1009), the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, and the grand prize opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed. The process is finished while the big winning opening is open.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109. Move to the processing of. Further, when the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect of executing a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot round is continued, and notifying that the jackpot round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation B to F (see Fig. 9), the production from the start of the special game state to the final round at the long opening is a common production, and it is the same as the final round at the long opening. In the round where there is a possibility of becoming a round, a round continuous notification effect is performed to notify whether or not the long opening will continue in the next round in the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 is closed. That is, the round continuous notification effect is performed during the interval period of 4R, 8R, and 12R.

For example, from 1R to 4R, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the round continuous notification effect is executed in the interval period after the special variation winning device 38 is closed at the 4th R. If it is 16R probability variation B to D, F, the round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened with a long opening even in the 5th and subsequent rounds. Further, in the case of the 16R probability variation E, the round discontinuation is notified (rank down effect) in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened with a short opening in the 5th and subsequent rounds.

After that, in the 16R probability variations B to D and F, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 5R to 8R, and the round continues in the interval period after the special variation winning device 38 is closed at the 8th R. Execute the notification effect. If it is 16R probability variation B, C, F, the round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is opened with a long opening even in the 9th and subsequent rounds. Further, in the case of the 16R probability variation D, the round discontinuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened with a short opening in the 9th and subsequent rounds.

Further, in the 16R probability variations B, C, and F, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 9R to 12R, and the round continues in the interval period after the special variation winning device 38 is closed at the 12th R. Execute the notification effect. If the 16R probability changes B and F, the round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened with a long opening even in the 13th and subsequent rounds. Further, in the case of the 16R probability variation C, the round discontinuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened with a short opening in the 13th and subsequent rounds.

If the large winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4, 8, 12R) (step). A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time for rank-down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. To do.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the remaining ball of the winning opening. To finish.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step). A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the big winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A1113). After that, the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed to end the jackpot remaining ball processing.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). .. Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The migration information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which information on the production mode is further included in any of "high probability / time saving" and "high probability / no time saving". In the case of this embodiment, since the probability change state is always reached when the jackpot ends (so-called ST state), the probability information commands are "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect mode B". , "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode C", "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but also "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", " There are "low probability, no time reduction, production mode B" and "low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high-probability fluctuation count is prepared (step A1214), the effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1216), and the jackpot is hit. End the end process.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the small hit fanfare medium processing, the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28B, in the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, “8” related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is used as the special figure game processing. Save to the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the large winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1) is saved. The operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit medium processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed to perform the small hit operation transition setting process. End the hit processing.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle process is completed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 30A, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30B, in the small hit end processing transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is used as the special figure game process. Save to the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting process is completed. ..

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the migration information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save to the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1616.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610). The effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Further, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), and the effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1616), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1617) is performed, and the small hit end process is completed.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (step S110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the Fuzu game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the normal map fluctuation are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric power remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). ) To end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B102). ).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B104). Then, the hit random number is extracted, saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (step B105), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step B106), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a normal map start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of execution rights of the normal variation display game as the normal map start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the predetermined area.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, and the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the updated normal electric counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, it hits the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure, saves the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") (step B205), clears the normal figure game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and performs the normal power winning switch monitoring process. finish. That is, if there is a prize for a regular train that exceeds the upper limit value during the hit state of the regular map, the hit state of the regular map ends in the middle at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the number of normal electric power counts is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the general electric power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B201; Y). ) Performs the normal process transition setting process 1 (step B322) of the normal figure, and ends the normal process of the normal figure. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) of the RWM (step B301; N). Step B302), the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the user is in the high probability of the normal map, that is, in the time saving state, which is higher than the probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) (step B304).

When the normal figure is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the normal figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the normal figure is in the high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (Step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B309), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B310), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B311), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit probability at the low probability of the normal figure is 0/251, the hit probability at the high probability of the normal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low (normal operating state), the value of the hit random number is deviated in all cases of "0" to "250". In addition, when the probability is high (time saving operation state), the hit random number value is any of "1" to "250", and the hit random number value is "0". ..

After saving the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316). After that, the normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the normal figure game mode state is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B317). Here, when the probability of the normal map is low, 700 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the normal map, and when the probability of the high probability of the normal map is set, 500 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the normal map. Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B318), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B319), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B320). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1. Then, the process transition setting process (step B321) during the change of the normal figure is performed, and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated.

As described above, at the time of high probability (time saving operation state), the value of the hit random number may be any of "1" to "250", and the value of the hit random number may be "0". It will be out of order. Therefore, in the time-saving operation state, the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is almost every time. If the normal figure start memory becomes 0 and the hit state does not end in the time-saving operation state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 will repeatedly open and close, and the player hardly reduces the number of balls held and the special figure changes. The display game can also continue the game without interruption, which is advantageous for the player. However, when the normal figure start memory becomes 0 and the hit state ends, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed until a new normal figure start memory is generated and the normal figure change display game is hit, and the ball is held. As the number of games decreases, the possibility that the special figure variation display game is not continuously executed increases, which is disadvantageous for the player.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), that is, if the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of order, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B511) for shifting to the normal figure normal process. Is performed to end the processing during display of the normal map.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), that is, if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit (specific result), is it during normal power support (high probability of normal map)? Is determined (step B504).

Then, when the normal power is being supported (high probability of the normal figure) (step B504; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B505), and the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is set. The value (for example, any of "0", "2", and "4") is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B506). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B507). After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B210) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

On the other hand, when it is not during the normal power support (high probability of the normal map) (step B504; N), the hit start pointer value for normal time (for example, "4" because it opens once) is set and the normal map is hit. Save to the control pointer area (step B508). Next, a normal power opening time (for example, 100 ms regardless of the type of winning symbol) for normal time is set and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B509). After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B210) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a normal variable winning device control means that generates a hit state that converts the normal variable winning device 37 into an open state based on the result of the normal figure variation display game becoming a specific result.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during normal drawing.
Further, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the normal operation shifts without performing the process of updating the normal processing control pointer area per normal figure by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed to end the process during normal drawing.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am trying to do it. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that after the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. The wait time of is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B612), and in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B613), and the normal power operation transition setting is made. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B614), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B615). Ends the solenoid operation transition setting process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Therefore, the processing number is "4". Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B619), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B612, 200 msec is saved as the wait time, in step B614, 1700 msec is saved as the normal electric opening time, and in step B618, 600 msec is saved as the normal electric remaining ball processing time. ..

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1" in the high probability of the normal figure, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the processing during display of the normal figure shown in FIG. In step B507 of the process during display of the normal map, "500 ms" is acquired as the normal power opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, since the normal power release time is "500 msec", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is opened for 500 msec, and then the control pointer is set to "4". Therefore, a normal electric remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2" in the high probability of the normal figure, "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the processing during display of the normal figure shown in FIG. In step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power opening time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, since the normal power release time is "1700 msec", the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the weight of 200 msec is 200 msec because the control pointer is "2". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. The normal electric remaining ball processing time is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 3" in the high probability of the normal figure, "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B506 of the processing during display of the normal figure shown in FIG. In step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power opening time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "0", the weight of 200 msec is waited. The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "2", so it is 200 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining sphere processing time of the normal electric power is set.

If the normal symbol stop symbol is any of "hit symbol 1", "hit symbol 2", and "win symbol 3" in the low probability of the normal symbol, step B508 of the process during display of the normal symbol shown in FIG. In, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer, and "100 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time in step B509 of the processing during display of the normal map. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power is released for 100 msec because the normal power release time is "100 msec", and then the normal power is released for 100 msec, and then the normal control pointer per figure is "4", so the normal power is 600 msec. The remaining electric ball processing time is set.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the normal drawing per-end processing, the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation display game (for example, turning off the middle signal per normal symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

Next, an example of the production will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

Further, in the lower part of the display area, a first hold display unit 83 for performing the first hold display, which is one of the hold displays for displaying the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory, is provided. The first special figure 1 hold display unit 83 displays the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory, and the special figure 2 start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory. There is a first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b.

The decorative start memory display displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the special figure 1 start memory and is displayed side by side in the order of memory. Here, four special figure 1 starts. Indicates that you have a memory. Further, the decorative start memory display displayed on the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b has a one-to-one correspondence with the special figure 2 start memory, and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. Here, four special figures are displayed. 2 Indicates that there is a start memory.

In each hold display unit, the decorative start memory display at the left end is the decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to give a pending change notice that suggests and notifies the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory, the look-ahead result of the fluctuation pattern, etc. according to the display mode. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left of the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a and the third decorative start memory display from the left of the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83 are normal display modes (here, the display mode is the third decorative start memory display from the left. The display mode is different from that of white) (shaded in this case), and a pending change notice is given to suggest and notify the look-ahead result.

There are a plurality of types of changes in the display mode, and for example, the degree of expectation of a special result differs depending on the type. Further, although the change in the display color is shown here as the change in the display mode, the display or the shape of the character or the like may be changed. Further, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory and the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory may be displayed side by side in the order of occurrence on one hold display unit. In this case, the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory may be displayed so as to be distinguishable.

To the left of the hold display unit 83, which is the lower part of the display area, an execution hold display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative start memory display at the left end of the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a or the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is transferred to the executing hold display unit 84 and executed. The result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested and notified according to the display mode.

Further, in the upper right part of the display area, a second hold display unit 86 for performing a second hold display, which is one of the hold displays for the display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory, is provided. The second special figure 2 hold display unit 86 includes a second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a that displays a display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory, and a second special figure 2 hold display unit 86a that displays a display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory. There is 86b. The second hold display unit 86 displays the number of the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory numerically. Here, it is shown that each has four starting memories. Of course, similarly to the first hold display unit 83, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory on a one-to-one basis may be displayed.

The first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86 both display the display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory. As will be described later, the first hold display unit 83 may be hidden by the operation of the sub display device 49 forming the effect display or the movable effect device, but the second hold display unit 86 is the effect display or the sub display device. It is not hidden by 49 and is always visible.

FIG. 41 shows an example of the production of SP3 reach in which the result is out of order. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), two special figure 1 start memories and two special figure 2 start memories are stored. Further, the second decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is set to a display mode different from the normal display mode, and a hold change notice suggesting a look-ahead result is given. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the identification information is variablely displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas, and then the left and right variable display as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The same identification information temporarily stops in the area and enters the reach state. In the left and right variable display areas, the identification information is displayed in a swayed state to indicate that it is a temporary stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started. The reach effect display here is an effect display in which the background display indicated by the model name "CR Tora" covers the screen. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, the reach state is developed, and as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the SP3 reach effect display, which is one of the predetermined specific effects, is started. Even during the execution of this SP3 reach effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left part of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden. The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued.

In this way, during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, and only the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. By doing so, the display area can be widely used for the production, the interest of the game can be improved, and the information of the starting memory can be always shown. Then, when the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 as shown in FIG. 41 (d). Is updated immediately. Further, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b of the second hold display unit 86 is displayed as shown in FIG. 41 (e). It will be updated immediately. As a result, the player can confirm the information of the start memory even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (f), when the specific effect is completed, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. In addition, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is resumed. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect, and the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is updated. In, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is updated to be displayed. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a hold change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to these new start memories. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b. Is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and the pre-reading result is suggested.

FIG. 42 shows a so-called pseudo-continuous variation in which a re-variation display is performed once or more to start the variation display again after temporarily stopping in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decorative special figure variation display game in the middle of the special figure variation display game. An example of an effect of SP3 reach, in which the result is out of order after the display mode is executed, is shown. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), two special figure 1 start memories and two special figure 2 start memories are stored, and the second decorative start from the left in the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is stored. The storage display has a display mode different from the normal display mode, and a pending change notice suggesting a look-ahead result is given.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas to reach the reach state, the reach effect is one of the predetermined specific effects as shown in FIG. 42 (b). The display starts. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the pseudo-continuous effect display which forms one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is started is started. Even during the execution of this pseudo continuous effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden. The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued.

When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is immediately displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (c). Will be updated to. After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the pseudo continuous effect display ends, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas are temporarily stopped.

Further, with the end of the pseudo continuous effect display, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is resumed. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a hold change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to a new start memory. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is usually displayed. The display mode is different from that of the above, and the pre-reading result is suggested.

After that, the re-variation display is performed as shown in FIG. 42 (e), and the reach state is reached again as shown in FIG. 42 (f). Then, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started in the same manner as described above, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. At the same time, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (h), a pseudo-continuous effect display forming one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is performed is performed, and as shown in FIG. 42 (i), the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. The display ends, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is resumed. Then, the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas are temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (j), when the special drawing 2 start memory occurs in a state where the first hold display unit 83 and the in-execution hold display unit 84 are displayed without performing the specific effect, FIG. 42 As shown in (k), the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is immediately updated to be displayed. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a pending change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to a new start memory, and here, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory is different from the normal display mode. It is a display mode, and the pre-reading result is suggested. In addition, the display is also updated in the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b with the occurrence of the start memory.

Then, a reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 42 (k), the reach effect display is started as shown in FIG. 42 (l), and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is placed in the upper left portion of the display area. In addition to being displayed small, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, the SP3 reach effect display is executed as shown in FIG. 42 (m), the result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 42 (n), and the special figure variation display game ends.

As described above, in the pseudo-continuous variation display mode, the first hold display unit 83 is hidden during the execution of the unit variation display, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 is temporarily displayed during the execution of the unit variation display. It is possible to execute a restart display that restarts the operation, and in the restart display, it is possible to update the display when a new start memory is generated. Of course, the timing of hiding and resuming the first hold display unit 83 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 42 and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it is hidden during temporary stop and displayed during re-variation. You may do it.

In addition, in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, when the first hold display unit 83 is redisplayed, it is possible to start the hold change notice suggesting the look-ahead result corresponding to the new start memory generated in the hidden state. , The display mode (suggestion content) may be changed for the pending change notice that has already been started. Of course, the timing for changing the display mode (suggestion content) of the pending change notice that has already been started can be arbitrarily set in addition to this. Further, in FIG. 42, the re-variation display is performed after the display mode of the reach state is once set, but the re-variation display may be performed by temporarily stopping instead of the display mode of the reach state. Further, in FIG. 42, the first hold display unit 83 is displayed during the re-variation display, but once temporarily stopped, it is not displayed until the end of the pseudo-continuous variation display mode or the end of the special figure variation display game. You can do it.

Next, the control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes the main process shown in FIG. 43 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 43, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP 312 is performed (step C3) to allow interrupts (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and a reception command check process (step C11) that analyzes and responds to a command from the game control device 100 is performed (step C11). Step C12) is performed.

Next, the scenario setting process (step C13) and the motion control process (step C14) for controlling the progress of the effect are performed, the drawing command is edited and transmitted (step C15), and the preparation end of the drawing command is set. (Step C16). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C17). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C17 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

After that, a sound control process (step C19) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration that controls the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the information display device 800. The control process (step C20), the movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 44 shows the received command check process (step C12) in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C31), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C32). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C32; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C32; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C33).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C34), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C35), and whether or not the command copying for the number of command receptions is completed is completed. (Step C36). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C36 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C36; N), the process returns to step C34. When it is determined that the copying of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C36; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C37), and the received command analysis process (step C38) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C39), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C40). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C40; N), the process returns to the process of step C37. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C40; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 45 shows the received command analysis process (step C38) in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C51), and it is determined whether or not the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C52). When it is determined that the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C52; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C53).

Further, when it is determined in step C52 that MODE and ACT are not in the normal range (step C52; N), or when it is determined in step C53 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step C53; N), reception is received. End the command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C53 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C53; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of one-shot commands such as the hold number command and the error command (step C53). C54). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C54; Y), the single-shot command process (step C55) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C54 that MODE is not in the range of one-shot commands (step C54; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of symbol commands (step C56). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C56; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C57) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C56, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the symbol system command (step C56; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the variable system command (step C58). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C58; Y), the variable command process (step C59) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C58 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C58; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C60). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C60; Y), the jackpot command process (step C61) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C60, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C60; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C62). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C62; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C62) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C62 that the MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C62; N), the MODE determines whether or not the MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C64). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C64; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C65) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead commands (look-ahead variable commands and look-ahead symbol commands) are commands that notify in advance the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols corresponding to the start memory, and are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 when the start prize is won. To. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display. Based on this look-ahead command, the look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as look-ahead notice or look-ahead effect) is set. The look-ahead notice effect is whether or not (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is subsequently executed. , Preliminary notification to the player with a predetermined reliability, hold change notice that changes the decoration start memory display, notice effect that performs voice, LED light emission, effect display, etc., multiple special figure variation display games Includes continuous production and the like.

If it is determined in step C64 that the MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C64; N), the MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the test mode command (step C66). The test mode commands are commands that command the operation in the test mode (including commands that command the transition to the test mode). The test mode has nothing to do with the game in the market, but whether various devices (display, sound, LED, motor, solenoid, etc. controlled by the production control device) operate normally before the game machine is shipped, etc. This is one of the modes of the effect control device that enables the check to be performed, and is a mode different from the normal gaming state.

When the MODE determines that the range of the test mode command is within the range (step C66; Y), the test mode command process (step C67) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C66 that MODE is not within the range of the test mode command (step C66; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 46 shows a symbol-based command process (step C57) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this symbol-based command processing, first, the special symbol type (either special diagram 1 or special diagram 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C71), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C72) and end the symbol command processing.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A to F symbol, a 6R probability variation symbol, a 2R probability variation A, B symbol, and a small hit symbol, and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from multiple symbol type setting tables. Is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set by referring to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 47 shows a variable command process (step C59) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C81). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C71 of the above-mentioned symbol-based command processing.

When this special figure type is undecided (step C81; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C81; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C82), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C83).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C83; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C83; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C84). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation A to F symbol, a 6R probability variation symbol, a 2R probability variation A, B symbol, and a small hit symbol. When the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, it is possible to perform an effect such as when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A symbol is received. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C84), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C85).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C86). Here, the special map is changing means that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C87), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
48 and 49 show the variation effect setting process (step C85) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C91). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C91; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type set at that time and the production mode at that time is set. (Step C92). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always a missed symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in this embodiment, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device 100), which naturally differs depending on the model, but here, the normal mode is used. There are probabilistic mode, time saving mode and latent mode. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C93). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C96).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C91; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type set at that time is set. (Step C94). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C95), and the first half change is being performed using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C96).

Next, from step C97 to step C99, a notice effect of the latter half change is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action. In the case of the pseudo-ream variation display mode as shown in FIG. 42, the first half variation is performed until the pseudo-ream ends and the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 42 (k). Will fluctuate in the second half.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type set at that time is set (step C97). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C98), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C99).

After that, as shown in FIG. 49, the basic BGM number (the song number of the basic BGM) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of the effect by the decorative lamp or the like) corresponding to the effect mode are set (step C100). Since the BGM and decorations that are normally fluctuating differ depending on the production mode, the default for each production mode is set first. When special BGM or decoration is performed for advance notice, etc., the change is made in the scenario table that manages the flow of production.

Next, advance notice distribution is performed according to the first half variation type drawn by step C96. Here, only a part of the advance notice distribution when the first half fluctuation type as shown in FIG. 42 is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation is shown. The first half variation type is a variation notice type that is distributed on the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, pseudo-continuous variation). Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is a re-variation in which the variation display is started again after temporarily stopping in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game. This is a so-called pseudo-continuous variation display mode in which the display is performed once or more. This pseudo-continuous variation display mode includes those in which the number of times of re-variation display is different. For example, the pseudo-ream 3 variation included in the pseudo-ream variation display mode is to perform the re-variation display twice as shown in FIG. 42. In other words, it is an effect that makes it appear as if the special figure variation display game was performed three times in a pseudo manner by the two temporary stops and the display of the final result mode.

In the determination of whether the first half variation type is a pseudo-ream (step C101), if it is not a pseudo-ream (step C101; N), the advance notice distribution is performed in the case of another first half variation type, which is omitted here, and the process proceeds to step C103. To do. Further, in the case of the pseudo-ream (step C101; Y), the pseudo-ream effect setting process for setting the effect related to the pseudo-ream variation display mode is performed (step C102), and the process proceeds to step C103.

In step C103, it is determined whether the special figure type is the special figure 2 variation. In the case of the variation of the special figure 2 (step C103; Y), the special figure 2 hold scenario table information corresponding to the number of the special figure 2 hold is set (step C104). As a result, an animation scenario in which the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory is reduced is set. Next, the fourth symbol (special figure 2 variation) scenario table information is set (step C105). The fourth symbol is a symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variable display game separately from the decorative special symbol variable display game by the first to third symbols on the display device 41, and by this processing, the decorative special symbol by the fourth symbol is displayed. Figure Fluctuation display Information about fluctuations in the game is set.

If the special figure 2 does not fluctuate in step C103 (step C103; N), the special figure 1 hold scenario table information corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is set (step C106), and the special figure 1 start memory is supported. Set up an animation scenario where the decoration start memory display is reduced. Next, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation) scenario table information is set (step C107), and the information related to the variation of the decorative special symbol variation display game by the fourth symbol is set.

After that, the effect setting process is performed according to the latter half fluctuation pattern. Here, only a part of the latter half fluctuation patterns are shown, but the effect setting process for the other latter half fluctuation patterns is also performed. First, it is determined whether the ACT data (data of the latter half fluctuation pattern) is out of SP3 (step C108). The SP3 loss is a fluctuation pattern in which the special 3 reach in which the result is a loss is executed as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. When the ACT data is out of SP3 (step C108; Y), the SP3 out-of-order setting process for setting the SP3 reach effect in which the result is out of order is performed (step C109), and the variable effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the ACT data is not out of SP3 (step C108; N), it is determined whether the ACT data is per SP3 (step C110).

The SP3 hit is a fluctuation pattern in which a special 3 reach is executed in which the result is a big hit or a small hit. Then, when the ACT data is per SP3 (step C110; Y), the SP3 per setting process is performed (step C111), and the variation effect setting process is terminated. If the ACT data is not per SP3 (step C110; N), processing for other variation patterns omitted here is performed, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

Process for setting the advance notice effect of the first half fluctuation such as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous effect setting process (step C102), process for setting the decorative special figure hold display in steps C104 to 107, process for setting the effect of the fourth symbol, and SP3 loss setting process. In the process of setting the effect according to the latter half fluctuation pattern such as (step C109) and the SP3 per setting process (step S111), the effect control device 300 controls by performing the process of setting the scenario control data for the effect. The effect operation in various devices is set.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the RAM of the effect control device 300 is provided with storage areas for scenario management called "scenario management registration address area" and "scenario management area". In the process of setting scenario control data for production, necessary data is set in these storage areas. Of these, the scenario management area includes a scenario timer area that stores the value of the scenario timer, a PB timer area that stores the value of the PB timer (push button timer), and a PB detection flag (push button detection flag). The structure includes a PB detection flag area for storing the value of) and a scenario data table area for storing the address of the scenario data table.

Further, there are scenario management areas having the same structure for each scenario layer, and since there are eight scenario layers here, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). The scenario management registration address area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, there are eight scenario layers, so the eight start addresses corresponding to these (scenario layer). It consists of eight areas for storing (0 address to scenario layer 7 address). Of these eight scenario layers, basically, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for production 1, scenario layer 2 is for the left symbol, and scenario layer 3 is for the right symbol. The scenario layer 4 is for the middle symbol, the scenario layer 5 is for the hold, the scenario layer 6 is for the effect 2, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, in the present embodiment, the number of scenario layers is eight, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for backgrounds, notices, and other effects increases or decreases depending on the model specifications, and in this embodiment, the explanation is limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various allocations may be possible.

In the process of setting scenario control data for production, by setting the necessary data in these storage areas, the address of the scenario table that defines a series of production contents for each scenario layer is specified, and this scenario table The production will proceed accordingly. As described above, the scenario management registration address area is provided for each scenario layer, and if there is something to control, the scenario is set in the corresponding scenario management registration address area X (any of X = 0 to 7). When the address of the management area is stored and there is nothing to control, the corresponding scenario management registration address area X is set to NULL. For example, since the hold is not displayed during the movie waiting for customers, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (scenario management registration address area corresponding to scenario management area 0). However, NULL is set in the hold area (scenario management registration address area corresponding to the scenario management area 5).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the RAM of the effect control device 300 is provided with storage areas for motion management called "motion management registration address area" and "motion management area". ing. These areas are areas for registering motions (a series of movements of the character, etc.) specified in the scenario table when the effect is executed according to the scenario table, and the registered motions are executed as the effect.

Of these, the motion management area is the number of displays (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol), which is the number (maximum number) of objects to be displayed and controlled (not necessarily displayed on the screen). Area for storing (3 items) (area for the number of displays), area for storing the frame number indicating how many frames the processing has progressed (area for the frame number), and the number of rows in the motion table. An area for storing the command position (command position area) and an area for storing address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table is used among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list). It is a structure including a table area) and a display information area for the number of displays.

In addition, there are motion management areas with the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers here, so this motion management There are also 14 areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, there are 14 motion management registration address areas (addresses for motion layer 0 to addresses for motion layer 13) corresponding to the motion management area.

That is, a plurality of motions can be controlled independently in one scenario, and a plurality of characters can be controlled in one motion. For example, in a normal symbol variation scenario, there are a motion of the left symbol, a motion of the middle symbol, a motion of the right symbol, and a motion of the fourth symbol, each of which is controlled independently. Further, for example, for the left symbol, three symbols of the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol can be displayed on one screen, so that the motion of the left symbol includes information corresponding to the three symbols.

Then, according to the contents of the scenario table, the motion of the layer is set by saving the motion table address which is the control contents in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding motion management area) corresponding to the layer number of the motion to be controlled. Will be done. In the present application, the motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) may be abbreviated as the motion number, or may be used as the motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). In some cases.

In addition, there are multiple display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (the number of objects), and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, the x coordinate of the upper left point of the display, and the upper left point of the display. Y coordinate, x coordinate of the upper right point of the display, y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, x coordinate of the lower left point of the display, y coordinate of the lower left point of the display, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture only video It contains an area for storing each data of the hour frame count and the behavior index.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether the object is a still image or a moving image (movie), as well as information indicating the type of the movie (whether it is an I picture, etc.)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing process such as giving transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency when transparency is given, etc.). The x-coordinate and y-coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image, and here, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), three points, a display upper left point, a display upper right point, and a display lower left point. There are coordinates of. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or movie. The frame count at the time of moving image of only IPicture is data indicating which frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). Note that the behavior (design replacement) is different from the cut-in character replacement, in which only the character (still image or moving image) is replaced at the same size and the same display position. In the cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of displaying the character can also be changed by the replacement.

The effect controlled by the effect control device 300 is first, a pseudo continuous effect setting process (step C102), a process of setting the decorative special figure hold display of steps C104 to 107, a process of setting the effect of the fourth symbol, and an SP3 loss setting process (step). The scenario table for each scenario layer is set in the process of setting the scenario control data for the effect such as C109) and the SP3 per setting process (step S111). Then, by registering, changing, and deleting the motion according to the scenario table, the effect according to the scenario table is realized.

As a result, for example, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 can be hidden or redisplayed according to the scenario table of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 83. This is realized by deleting or registering the display of the display unit 84. Further, the continuation of the display of the second hold display unit 86 is realized by displaying the display of the second hold display unit 86 so as to give priority to the background and other displays (on the front side). To. Of course, it is also set whether or not the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is displayed (on the front side) so as to give priority to the background and other displays. It may be realized by.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 51 shows a one-shot command process (step C55) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command processing, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a customer waiting demo (step C121).

When it is determined that the MODE is a customer waiting demo (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the P machine state is set during the customer waiting demo (step C122), and it is already set during the customer waiting demo. In the case (step C122; Y), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If it is not set during the customer waiting demo (step C122; N), the customer waiting scenario data setting process for setting the effect in the customer waiting state is performed (step C123). Further, the customer waiting A is set as the P machine state (step C124), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step C121 that the MODE is not a customer waiting demo (step C121; N), the MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 hold system, that is, the received command corresponds to the special figure 1 start memory. Figure It is determined whether the command is a hold count command (step C125). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 hold system (step C125; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step C126) for storing the information related to the hold of the special figure 1 is performed. Terminates single-shot command processing. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the special figure 1 hold system (step C125; N), the MODE is in the range of the special figure 2 hold system, that is, the received command corresponds to the special figure 2 start memory. It is determined whether or not the decorative special figure hold number command is used (step C127).

When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the special figure 2 hold system (step C127; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step C128) for storing the information related to the hold of the special figure 2 is performed. Terminates single-shot command processing. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the special figure 2 holding system (step C127; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the symbol stop system (step C129).

When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol stop system (step C129; Y), the symbol stop scenario data setting process for setting the effect when the symbol is stopped is performed (step C130), and the P machine state is normally set. Is set (step C131), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the symbol stop system (step C129; N), processing for other MODEs (not shown) such as RAM initialization, power failure recovery, error / invalidity, effect mode, and probability information is omitted. I do.

[Special figure 1 Hold information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step C126) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process. In this special figure 1 hold information setting process, first, the special figure 1 hold number is loaded to be the previous hold number (step C141), and the command value is set to the special figure 1 hold number to be the new hold number (step C142). ), It is determined whether the new hold number and the previous hold number match (step C143).

When the new hold number and the previous hold number match (step C143; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process ends. If the new hold number and the previous hold number do not match (step C143; N), it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being executed (step C144). The specific effect is an effect in which at least the first hold display unit 83 is hidden as described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

If this specific effect is not being executed (step C144; N), the process proceeds to step C146. When the specific effect is being executed (step C144; Y), the hidden information is set (step C145), the index of the hold motion control table corresponding to the new hold number is calculated and saved (step C144; Y). Step C146). Then, the scenario layer number 5 is prepared (step C147), the addresses of the special figure 1 hold scenario data table (X hold) are prepared (step C148), and the scenario data setting process is performed (step C149).

As a result, the display update of the first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86 is set. Since the second hold display unit 86 is always displayed, a scenario for immediately updating the display is set. Further, regarding the first hold display unit 83, the timing of updating the display differs depending on the presence or absence of the hidden information, and if the display is being displayed, a scenario for immediately updating the display is set and the display is hidden. If it is inside, set a scenario that is updated when the display is resumed. The timing at which the display is resumed can be obtained by acquiring the time from the progress of the currently executing production scenario to the end of the specific production. By setting such a scenario, the display of the first hold display unit 83 is updated when the display is resumed on the first hold display unit 83 as shown in FIGS. 41 (f) and 42 (d). Is possible.

After that, the hidden information is cleared (step C150), and it is determined whether the number of holds has increased (step C151). When the number of holdings increases (step C151; Y), the display pattern of the holding normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of holdings (step C152). The color information area is an area for storing information on the display mode of the decorative start memory display suggesting the look-ahead result, and here, a normal display mode is set as the display mode of the decorative start memory display corresponding to the newly generated start memory. To do. The change in the display mode of the decorative start memory display based on the look-ahead result of the start memory is performed by the later look-ahead variation command processing.

Then, it is determined whether the P machine state is in the big hit (during the special game state) (step C153), and when the P machine state is in the big hit (step C153; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is completed. To do. Further, when the P machine state is not a big hit (step C153; N), an output request for a start opening winning sound is requested (step C154), and the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of holds has not increased (step C151; N), that is, when it has decreased, the special figure 1 look-ahead information area is shifted (step C155) and the color information area is shifted (step C156). FIG. 1 Ends the hold information setting process.

In the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step C128) in the single-shot command process, the same process as the special figure 1 hold information setting process described above is performed for the special figure 2 start storage. By the above-mentioned special figure 1 hold information setting process and special figure 2 hold information setting process, the information corresponding to the generated hold is displayed on the first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86 at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start storage display means capable of displaying a hold display indicating information on the start memory stored in the start storage means on the display device 41.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
FIG. 53 shows a look-ahead symbol-based command process (step C63) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead symbol command processing, first, the received look-ahead stop symbol command is saved in the look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the total number of holds (step C301), and the look-ahead variation pattern command reception wait flag is set (step C302). , Ends the look-ahead symbol command processing. By setting the look-ahead fluctuation command reception wait flag, it is possible to process the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command information for the same start memory as a set (pair) by the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing described later.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
FIG. 54 shows a look-ahead variable command process (step C65) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead variation pattern command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a look-ahead variation pattern command reception waiting flag set in the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the command is waiting for reception. If the read-ahead variation pattern command is not waiting for reception (step C311; N), the look-ahead variation command processing ends. On the other hand, when waiting for the look-ahead variation pattern command reception (step C311; Y), the look-ahead variation pattern command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, the command is saved in the look-ahead fluctuation command area corresponding to the total number of holds (step C313), and the look-ahead command consistency check process (step C314) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed. .. If the command combination is not normal (step C315; N), that is, if the value of invalid command information is returned, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. In this case, the information of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command that is not normal may be cleared from the storage area. In addition, information (NG information) indicating that it is not normal may be saved in the corresponding storage area. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C315; Y), that is, when the value of the valid command information is returned, it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed (step C316). The specific effect is an effect in which at least the first hold display unit 83 is hidden as described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

If this specific effect is not being executed (step C316; N), the process proceeds to step C318. Further, when the specific effect is being executed (step C316; Y), the hidden information is set (step C317), the pre-reading lottery process (step C318) for drawing the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed, and the pre-reading notice is performed. It is determined whether or not the effect is generated (step C319).

Then, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not generated (step C319; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C319; Y), is the pre-reading notice effect (that is, the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C318)) immediately started? Is determined (step C320). The effect of immediately starting is, for example, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decorative start memory display on the first hold display unit 83 displayed on the display device 41 from the present time.

Further, the effect that does not start immediately is a hold change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from a predetermined timing later. For example, the first hold display unit 83 is hidden. This is a pending change notice that starts when the display is resumed. In addition to this, it is a look-ahead notice effect performed during the execution of the special figure variable display game, such as an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variable display games, and a character that appears during the variable display. It also includes a production that gives a notice by. At the timing when the execution of the effect that does not start immediately is started, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. Timing etc. are included.

In the case of the effect to be started immediately (step C320; Y), the drawing of the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C321), the hidden information is cleared (step C323), and the look-ahead variable command processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the effect is not to start immediately (step C320; N), the drawing reservation setting of the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C322), the hidden information is cleared (step C323), and the look-ahead variable command. End the process.

In the process (step C322) of setting the drawing reservation of the selected look-ahead notice effect, for example, when the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, the hold change notice is set to start at the timing when the display is resumed. To do. As a result, the hold change notice is started at the timing when the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed as shown in FIGS. 41 (f) and 42 (d). The timing at which the display is resumed can be obtained by acquiring the time from the progress of the currently executing production scenario to the end of the specific production.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory of the variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41 is provided, and the start memory display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) as a hold display. The second hold display (second hold display unit 86) can be displayed, the second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable display game, and the first hold display is during the execution of a predetermined specific effect. Is configured to be hidden, and when a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the first hold is displayed. Regarding the display, when the specific effect is completed and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, the start memory display means shows information about the start memory by displaying a start memory display corresponding to each start memory on a one-to-one basis in the first hold display, and displays the number of start memories in the second hold display. By displaying it, the information about the start memory is shown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second hold display, which is always displayed, from interfering with other effect displays.

Further, the start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and is one variable display game. The second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of, and the first hold display is configured to be hidden during the execution of a predetermined specific effect that is intermittently executed a plurality of times. When a new start memory is generated during the execution of, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the specific effect in which the new start memory is generated for the first hold display is displayed. When the display of the first hold display is resumed after the end, the display is updated due to the occurrence of a new start memory. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, for the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game, the unit fluctuation display that stops after displaying a plurality of identification information fluctuations for a predetermined time is performed a plurality of times of two or more times during the execution of the fluctuation display game to derive the result. There is a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern, and it means that the specific effect is performed during the execution of the unit fluctuation display. Therefore, the unit variation display can be effectively produced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the start memory display means can execute a restart display that temporarily resumes the display of the first hold display during the execution of the unit variation display, and in the restart display, the display associated with the occurrence of a new start memory is displayed. This means that the update can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the state of the start memory during the execution of the unit variation display, and it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

In addition, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game and a start winning area are provided. Shows information on a start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories together with random numbers for the execution right of a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball, and information on start memory stored in the start storage means. The start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display on the display device 41 and the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means are displayed before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. The start storage display means includes, as a hold display, a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display). Part 86) can be displayed, and during the execution of one variable display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed, and the first hold display is a predetermined specific effect that is intermittently executed a plurality of times. It is configured to be hidden during execution, and if a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the second is displayed. 1 Regarding the hold display, when the specific effect in which the new start memory is generated ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated according to the occurrence of the new start memory. In the variable display game in which the specific effect is executed, the notification of the determination result by the pre-judgment means for the start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed is notified by the first hold display accompanying the occurrence of the start memory. It will be possible to start when updating. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, the start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and is one variable display game. The second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of, and the first hold display is configured to be hidden during the execution of a predetermined specific effect that is intermittently executed a plurality of times. When a new start memory is generated during the execution of, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the specific effect in which the new start memory is generated for the first hold display is displayed. When the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display can be updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, and the notification of the determination result by the pre-judgment means for the new start memory can be started. There will be. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the determination result of the advance determination means can be notified at the same time as the first hold display is resumed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification has a different opportunity to hide the first hold display unit 83.

In the above-described first embodiment, the first hold display unit 83 is hidden when the display of the specific effect is triggered, but in this modification, the operable effect device is the first hold display on the display device 41. The first hold display unit 83 is hidden when the unit 83 overlaps the front side of the display area.

FIG. 55 shows an example of an effect of SP3 reach in which the result is out of order after the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is executed. The progress of the effect is the same as that of the SP3 reach effect in which the result is out of order after the pseudo-continuous variation display mode shown in FIG. 42 is executed. Further, although the sub display device 49 is used as an operable effect device here, any other combination is provided as long as the first hold display unit 83 in the display device 41 can overlap the front side of the display area. It may be a physical device.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and reaches the reach state, the sub display device 49 moves upward and the first hold display unit 83 in the display device 41 The reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is displayed on the display device 41 and the sub display device 49 as shown in FIG. 55 (b). It will be started.

As for the reach effect display here, the background display showing the model name "CR Tora" is displayed on the display device 41, and the background showing the model name "CR Tora" is also displayed on the sub display device 49. The display is what is displayed. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41. Further, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 of the display device 41 is hidden when the sub display device 49 is overlapped on the front side, but the display device 41 is the first display device 41. 2 The display of the hold display unit 86 is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the pseudo-continuous effect display which forms one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is started is started. Even during the execution of this pseudo-continuous effect display, the sub-display device 49 remains overlapped on the front side of the portion where the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 on the display device 41 are displayed, and the decorative special figure changes. The display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 is displayed. Will be continued. When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is immediately displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (c). Will be updated to.

After that, when the pseudo continuous effect display shown in FIG. 55 (c) ends, the sub display device 49 operates downward to return to the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the first display device 41 in the display device 41. The hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 do not overlap the front side of the displayed portion. Along with this, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is restarted in the display device 41. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area, and the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium variation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right variation displays. The area is temporarily stopped.

At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a hold change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to a new start memory. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is usually displayed. The display mode is different from that of the above, and the pre-reading result is suggested.

After that, the re-variation display is performed as shown in FIG. 55 (e), and the reach state is reached again as shown in FIG. 55 (f). Then, as described above, the sub display device 49 moves upward so that the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 in the display device 41 overlap the front side of the displayed portion, and FIG. 55 (g) shows. As shown in the above, the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the second hold display unit is hidden. The display of 86 is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), a pseudo-continuous effect display forming one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is performed is performed, and when the pseudo-continuous effect display ends, a sub-display is performed. The device 49 operates downward to return to the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 55 (i), the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 in the display device 41 do not overlap the front side of the displayed portion. It becomes. Along with this, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is restarted in the display device 41. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area, and the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium variation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right variation displays. The area is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated while the first hold display unit 83 is displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (j), the first special figure 2 hold display unit is as shown in FIG. 55 (k). It is immediately updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated in 83b. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a pending change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to a new start memory, and here, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory is different from the normal display mode. It is a display mode, and the pre-reading result is suggested. In addition, the display is also updated in the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b with the occurrence of the start memory.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (k), a reach state occurs, and the sub display device 49 moves upward in the same manner as described above, and the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 in the display device 41 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 55 (l), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started so as to overlap the front side of the formed portion. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the second hold display unit is hidden. The display of 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (m), the SP3 reach effect display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55 (n), when the specific effect is completed, the sub display device 49 operates downward to return to the initial position, and the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 in the display device 41 are displayed. It will not overlap the front side of the part. Along with this, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is restarted in the display device 41. Further, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area.

Such an effect and operation control of the effect device are also realized by setting a scenario table at the start of the special figure variation display game. Further, whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the special figure 1 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 52, the special figure 2 hold information setting process shown in FIG. Regarding the determination, since the effect device always overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 of the display device 41 is displayed during the specific effect, it depends on whether or not the specific effect is being executed. You may set the hidden information. Of course, the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed on the display device 41, determines whether or not the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, and sets the hidden information. You may try to do it.

The production device hides the first hold display unit 83 when it covers the entire area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. However, when the first hold display unit 83 covers a part of the display area, the first hold display unit 83 is hidden. 1 The hold display unit 83 may be hidden. Further, the area where the second hold display unit 86 is displayed is set to a position where it is not covered even if the effect device operates, but it may be an area covered when the effect device operates. In this case, the effect is produced. It may be moved to a position where it is not covered with the operation of the device. Further, regarding the executing hold display unit 84, even if the executing hold display unit 84 is not covered by the effect device, a part or all of the first hold display unit 83 is covered with the effect device and the first hold display is displayed. The unit 83 may be hidden in conjunction with the fact that it is hidden.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory with the execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41, and an effect device (sub display device) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. 49), and the start memory display means can display a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as hold displays. During the execution of the variable display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device. If a new start memory occurs while the display is hidden, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the first hold display is the first hold display. When the display is resumed, the display is updated when a new start memory is generated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, the start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and is one variable display game. The second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device that occurs intermittently multiple times. If a new start memory occurs when the first hold display is hidden, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the first hold display is displayed. Is to update the display accompanying the occurrence of the new start memory when the hidden state in which the new start memory is generated ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, the unit fluctuation display that stops after displaying the fluctuation of a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time is performed two or more times, and the result is derived. There is a continuous fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to make the effect device overlap with the first hold display during the execution of the unit fluctuation display. Therefore, the unit variation display can be effectively produced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game and a start winning area are provided. Shows information on a start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories together with random numbers for the execution right of a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball, and information on start memory stored in the start storage means. Before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed, the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display on the display device 41 and the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means are displayed. The start storage is provided with a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the above, and an effect device (sub display device 49) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. The display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and during the execution of one variable display game. , The second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is configured to be hidden when it overlaps with the effect device that occurs intermittently a plurality of times. If a new start memory occurs while the first hold display is hidden, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and a new start for the first hold display. When the hidden state in which the memory has occurred ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated according to the occurrence of a new start memory, and the first hold display is not displayed. In the variable display game to be displayed, the notification of the determination result by the pre-judgment means for the start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed is notified when the first hold display is updated due to the occurrence of the start memory. It will be possible to start. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, the start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and is one variable display game. The second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device that occurs intermittently multiple times. When a new start memory is generated while the first hold display is hidden, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the first hold display is changed to. Updates the display accompanying the occurrence of the new start memory when the hidden state in which the new start memory has occurred ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed. It is possible to start the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means of. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the determination result of the advance determination means can be notified at the same time as the first hold display is resumed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the display of the execution hold display unit 84 is continuously performed even during the execution of the specific effect.

FIG. 56 shows an example of the production of SP3 reach in which the result is out of order. The progress of the production is the same as that of the SP3 reach production in which the result shown in FIG. 41 is out of order. From the state in which the identification information is variablely displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the left and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The same identification information is temporarily stopped to enter the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started.

At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the display of the execution hold display unit 84 is also continued. Further, the reach state is developed, and as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the SP3 reach effect display which is one of the predetermined specific effects is started. Even during the execution of this SP3 reach effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left part of the display area, the display of the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, and the execution hold display unit 84 and the execution hold display unit 84 and The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (f), when the specific effect is completed, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. In addition, the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed. In this way, by continuing the display of the execution hold display unit 84, it is possible to constantly perform the advance notice effect of the special figure variation display game being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, it is possible to hide only the first hold display unit 83 during the execution of the specific effect by setting the scenario table at the start of the special figure variation display game. Although the SP3 reach effect display is mentioned here as the specific effect, the display of the execution hold display unit 84 may be continued even in the pseudo continuous effect display as shown in FIG. 42. Of course, the display of the pending display unit 84 may be continued for other specific effects.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of the execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the area and the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41 is provided, and the start memory display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) as a hold display. The second hold display (second hold display unit 86) and the running hold display (running hold display unit 84) that displays information about the start memory corresponding to the running variable display game can be displayed and fluctuates. The second hold display and the running hold display are continuously displayed during the execution of the display game, and the first hold display is hidden during the execution of the predetermined specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, by continuing the display of the pending display during execution, it is possible to constantly perform a notice effect on the variable display game being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the start memory display means updates the display with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and updates the display for the first hold display. When the specific effect is completed and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated when a new start memory is generated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

It should be noted that the configuration of this modification is changed when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83, which is the configuration of the first modification described above, is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57, the running hold display unit 84 is moved to a position where it is not covered by the operation of the sub display device 49, or the running hold display unit 84 is moved from the beginning. The displayed area is set to a position where it is not covered even if the sub display device 49 operates.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory with the execution right of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41, and an effect device (sub display device) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. 49), and the start storage display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83), a second hold display (second hold display unit 86), and a variable display during execution as the hold display. It is possible to display a running hold display (running hold display unit 84) that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the game, and during the execution of the variable display game, the second hold display and the running hold display are effect devices. It is displayed continuously at a position where it does not overlap with, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, by continuing the display of the pending display during execution, it is possible to constantly perform a notice effect on the variable display game being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a new start memory is generated while the first hold display is hidden, the start memory display means updates the display of the second hold display with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the second Regarding the 1 hold display, when the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated due to the occurrence of a new start memory. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the special figure variation display game in which the specific effect is intermittently executed multiple times, the gaming machine of this modified example provides a look-ahead notice effect for the newly generated start memory until all of the specific effects executed multiple times are completed. I try not to start.

FIG. 58 shows an example of an effect of SP3 reach in which the result is out of order after the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is executed. The progress of the effect is the same as that of the SP3 reach effect in which the result is out of order after the pseudo-continuous variation display mode shown in FIG. 42 is executed. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas to reach the reach state, the reach effect is one of the predetermined specific effects as shown in FIG. 58 (b). The display starts. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the pseudo-continuous effect display which forms one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is started is started. Even during the execution of this pseudo continuous effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden. The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued.

When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is immediately displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (c). Will be updated to. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the pseudo continuous effect display ends, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas are temporarily stopped.

Further, with the end of the pseudo continuous effect display, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is resumed. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect. However, the pending change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the new start memory, is not started here, and the display mode of the decorative start memory display is the normal display mode.

After that, the re-variation display is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (e), and the reach state is reached again as shown in FIG. 58 (f). Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is started in the same manner as described above, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. At the same time, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), a pseudo-continuous effect display forming one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is performed is performed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (i), the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. When the display is completed, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is resumed. In addition, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area, and the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium variation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right variation displays. The area is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated while the first hold display unit 83 is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (j), the first special figure 2 hold display unit is as shown in FIG. 58 (k). It is immediately updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated in 83b. However, since all the specific effects have not been completed here, the hold change notice, which is the look-ahead notice effect for the new start memory, is not started, and the display mode of the decorative start memory display is the normal display mode. In addition, the display is also updated in the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b with the occurrence of the start memory.

Then, a reach state occurs as shown in FIG. 58 (k), the reach effect display is started as shown in FIG. 58 (l), and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is placed in the upper left portion of the display area. In addition to being displayed small, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, the SP3 reach effect display is executed as shown in FIG. 58 (m), and with the end of the SP3 reach effect display, the first hold display unit 83 and the in-execution hold display unit 83 are executed as shown in FIG. 58 (n). The display of 84 is resumed. Further, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area, the result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (n), and the special figure variation display game ends.

At this time, the hold change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the newly generated start memory in the special figure change display game, can be started. Here, regarding the special figure 1 start memory newly generated in the special figure variation display game, the display mode in which the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is different from the normal display mode. It is said that the pre-reading result is suggested. Further, regarding the special figure 2 start memory newly generated in the special figure variation display game, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is different from the normal display mode. The pre-reading result is suggested.

In the special figure variation display game that executes the specific effect in this way, it is possible not to start the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start memory until all the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game are completed. It can be set in the look-ahead variable command processing shown in 54. That is, in the determination of whether or not the effect is to start immediately (step C320), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be started immediately from the occurrence timing of the start memory and the content of the advance notice effect, and the selected pre-reading advance notice is selected. This can be achieved by setting an appropriate start timing in the drawing reservation setting (step C322) of the effect.

Here, as a specific effect, an example in which the start memory is generated during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect display is given, but the start memory generated during the execution of the SP3 reach effect display is also executed in the special figure variation display game. The hold change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the start memory, is not started until all of the specific effects are completed. Of course, with respect to the start memory generated during the execution of other specific effects, the hold change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the start memory, is not started until all the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game are completed. To do so. Further, the look-ahead notice effect other than the hold change notice may not be started until all the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game are completed.

Further, regarding the start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect, when the start memory is generated, whether or not to start the look-ahead notice effect in the first hold display unit 83 whose display is resumed with the end of the specific effect. It may be decided according to the type of the specific effect being executed. For example, with respect to the start memory generated during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect display, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be started in the first hold display unit 83 whose display is resumed when the pseudo continuous effect display ends, and the pseudo continuous effect display is displayed. Regarding the start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect other than the above, the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start memory may not be started until all the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game are completed.

Further, for the start memory generated during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is displayed but all the specific effects are not completed, the first hold display unit 83 does not immediately start the look-ahead notice effect. However, the look-ahead notice production may be started immediately. Further, the start memory generated when the first hold display unit 83 is displayed and before the start of the first specific effect in the special figure variation display game is immediately displayed on the first hold display unit 83. The look-ahead notice effect may be started, or the look-ahead notice effect may not be started until all the specific effects are completed. On the contrary, for the start memory generated during the period when the specific effect is executed and the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, the look-ahead notice effect is started when the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed. 1 For the start memory that occurred during the period when the hold display unit 83 is displayed but not all the specific effects are completed, the first hold display unit 83 does not immediately start the look-ahead notice effect. Is also good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, a pre-reading notice effect regarding the start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect (here, the SP3 reach effect) is shown in FIG. 59 (f), in which the start memory is generated. After the variation display game is finished, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), the next special figure variation display game may be started at the timing when it is started. Here, in FIG. 59 (g), the first special figure variation display game is started based on the special figure 1 start memory. Therefore, in FIG. 59 (f), the decorative start memory display displayed at the left end of the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is erased, and the remaining decorative start memory display becomes one. It is in a state of shifting to the left one by one. However, if the start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is for executing the next special figure variation display game, the execution hold display unit 84 gives a notice.

Of course, the start timing of the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed during the execution of the specific effect or the resumption of the display is not limited to the above. For example, in FIGS. 56 and 58, the timing is set when all the specific effects are completed and the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed, but as the timing when all the specific effects are completed and the result mode is displayed. Is also good. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58, even if there is no specific effect after FIG. 58 (k), the pre-reading advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (n).

Further, the decision as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect is performed when the look-ahead system command is received from the game control device 100, and even if the execution is decided, all of the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game. It was decided not to start the look-ahead notice effect for the start memory until the end of the game, but the decision itself as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect is completed for all the specific effects executed in the special figure variation display game. You may not do it until you do.

Further, the start memory generated during the period when the specific effect is executed and the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, and the period during which the first hold display unit 83 is displayed, but all the specific effects are completed. For both or one of the start memories generated during the non-pre-reading period, the look-ahead notice effect may not be executed, or the hold change notice of the look-ahead notice effects may not be executed. For example, when the pending change notice is not executed for both of these start memories, whether or not the variable display game in which the specific effect is executed instead of the hidden information is being executed in the look-ahead variable command processing. Specific effect execution information may be set, and if there is this specific effect execution information, the lottery may be performed using a table that does not include the pending change notice in the look-ahead lottery process. Further, in the look-ahead lottery process, the lottery is performed using the table including the hold change notice, but if there is specific effect execution information, the hold change notice may not be executed even if it is selected.

Further, as described above, the start memory in which the lottery is performed using the table that does not include the hold change notice in the look-ahead lottery process, and the hold change notice that the lottery is performed using the table that includes the hold change notice in the look-ahead lottery process. Regarding the start memory that was selected but not executed, a lottery will be performed again at a later timing such as when all the specific effects are completed or when the next special figure fluctuation display game is started, and the pending change notice is executed. It may be possible.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Regarding the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store the execution right of the variable display game together with the random number up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the start memory stored in the start storage means. A variable display game based on the start memory is executed with the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display indicating information on the display device 41 and the random numbers stored as the start memory in the start memory means. A pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining before is provided, and the start storage display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display) as hold displays. 2 Hold display unit 86) can be displayed, and during the execution of one variable display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed, and the first hold display is intermittently executed a plurality of times. It is configured to be hidden during the execution of the specific effect, and if a new start memory occurs during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory. However, with regard to the first hold display, when the specific effect in which the new start memory is generated ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated due to the occurrence of the new start memory. The notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory is not started until all the specific effects executed a plurality of times in the variation display game are completed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, by not starting the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means until all the specific effects are completed, the interest in the specific effects is not distracted and the effect of the specific effects is not impaired.

In addition, the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is started based on the end of all the specific effects executed a plurality of times in the variable display game. Is also good. Further, the notification of the determination result by the prior determination means for the new start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect may be started based on the fact that the result mode is derived in the variable display game. Further, the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect may be started based on the start of the next variation display game of the variation display game.

Further, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game and a start winning area are provided. Shows information on a start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories together with random numbers for the execution right of a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball, and information on start memory stored in the start storage means. Before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed, the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display on the display device 41 and the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means are displayed. The start storage display means includes, as a hold display, a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display). Part 86) can be displayed, and during the execution of one variable display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed, and the first hold display is a predetermined specific effect that is intermittently executed a plurality of times. It is configured to be hidden during execution, and if a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the second is displayed. 1 Regarding the hold display, when the specific effect in which a new start memory is generated ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated according to the occurrence of the new start memory. In the variable display game in which the specific effect is executed, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display is notified a plurality of times in the variable display game. This means that it will not start until all the specific effects to be executed are completed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, by not starting the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means until all the specific effects are completed, the interest in the specific effects is not distracted and the effect of the specific effects is not impaired.

In addition, the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display ends all the specific effects executed multiple times in the variable display game. You may start based on what you do. Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display starts based on the fact that the result mode is derived in the variable display game. You may try to do it. Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display starts based on the start of the next variation display game of the variation display game. You may try to do it.

Further, the configuration of this modification is changed to the configuration of the first modification described above, when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. FIG. 60 shows an example of the effect in this case. The progress of the effect is the same as that of the SP3 reach effect in which the result is out of order after the pseudo-continuous variation display mode shown in FIG. 42 is executed.

In this case, with respect to the start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the sub display device is displayed from the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (d). The first hold display unit 83 whose display is resumed based on the evacuation of 49 does not start the hold change notice which is the look-ahead notice effect at the restarted timing. Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), the first hold display unit 83 also includes the start memory generated during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is displayed but all the specific effects are not completed. Then, the pending change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect, is not immediately started. As shown in FIG. 60 (n), the hold change notice, which is a look-ahead notice effect for these start memories, can be started when all of the hidden states that occur a plurality of times are completed.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Regarding the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store the execution right of the variable display game together with the random number up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the start memory stored in the start storage means. A variable display game based on the start memory is executed with the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display indicating information on the display device 41 and the random numbers stored as the start memory in the start memory means. It is provided with a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining before, and an effect device (sub-display device 49) that can be operated and can be overlapped with the front surface of the display device 41. , The start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and can display one variable display game. During execution, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device that occurs intermittently multiple times. If a new start memory is generated while the first hold display is hidden, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the first hold display is updated. When the hidden state in which a new start memory has occurred ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory. The notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means of the above means that the notification of the determination result is not started until all the hidden states that occur a plurality of times in the variable display game are completed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, by not starting the notification of the determination result by the pre-judgment means until all the hidden states are completed, the effect of the effect in the hidden state is not distracted from the effect in the hidden state. It does not impair the effect.

Further, as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, the unit fluctuation display that stops after displaying the fluctuation of a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time is performed two or more times, and the result is derived. There is a continuous fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to make the effect device overlap with the first hold display during the execution of the unit fluctuation display. Therefore, the unit variation display can be effectively produced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated when the first hold display is hidden means that all the hidden states that occur a plurality of times in the variable display game are terminated. You may start based on. Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated when the first hold display is hidden is started based on the fact that the result mode is derived in the variable display game. Is also good. Further, the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory generated when the first hold display is hidden is started based on the start of the next variation display game of the variation display game. Is also good.

Further, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game and a start winning area are provided. Shows information on a start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories together with random numbers for the execution right of a variable display game based on a winning of a game ball, and information on start memory stored in the start storage means. Before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed, the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display on the display device 41 and the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means are displayed. The start storage is provided with a pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the above, and an effect device (sub display device 49) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. The display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and during the execution of one variable display game. , The second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is configured to be hidden when it overlaps with the effect device that occurs intermittently a plurality of times. If a new start memory occurs while the first hold display is hidden, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the first hold display is newly started. When the hidden state in which the memory has occurred ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated according to the occurrence of a new start memory, and the first hold display is not displayed. In the variable display game to be displayed, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display is generated a plurality of times in the variable display game. It means that it will not start until all the hidden states are finished. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, by not starting the notification of the determination result by the pre-judgment means until all the effects in the hidden state are completed, the effect in the hidden state is not distracted and the effect in the hidden state is not distracted. It does not impair the production effect of the production.

In addition, the notification of the determination result by the pre-determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display is all the non-display states that occur a plurality of times in the variable display game. You may start based on the end. Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display starts based on the fact that the result mode is derived in the variable display game. You may try to do it. Further, the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means for the new start memory generated in the state where the first hold display is displayed due to the resumption of the display starts based on the start of the next variation display game of the variation display game. You may try to do it.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the mode of updating the hold display differs depending on the time when the start memory is generated.

FIG. 61 shows an example of an effect in which the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas to reach the reach state, the reach effect is one of the predetermined specific effects as shown in FIG. 61 (b). The display starts. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the pseudo-continuous effect display which forms one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is started is started. Even during the execution of this pseudo continuous effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden. The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued.

When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is immediately displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (c). Will be updated to. At this time, since the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed, in order to inform the player that the start memory has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner, the second special figure 1 The display mode emphasizes the update of the hold display unit 86a. Here, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a is made larger than usual to be emphasized. The highlighting may be in other modes, such as changing the display color or blinking the display. This highlighting is performed for a certain period of time, and then returns to the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 61 (d).

As shown in FIG. 61 (e), when the pseudo continuous effect display is completed, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas are temporarily stopped. Further, with the end of the pseudo continuous effect display, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is resumed. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect.

At this time, it is a start memory generated during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed, and is updated when the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed. Therefore, in order to inform the player that the start memory has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner, the display mode emphasizes the update of the hold display unit 83a of the first special figure 1. Here, the display of the corresponding decorative start memory display on the first special figure 1 hold display unit 86a is made larger than usual to be emphasized. The highlighting may be in other modes, such as changing the display color or blinking the display. Further, the display timing of the target decoration start memory display may be delayed from the display timing of the first hold display unit 83. This highlighting is performed for a certain period of time, and then returns to the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 61 (f). Here, the look-ahead notice effect is started in the decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory, but the highlight display and the look-ahead notice effect may be distinguished as different modes.

Further, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated as a new start memory when the specific effect is not being executed, the special figure 2 start generated in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b as shown in FIG. 61 (g). The display of the decorative start memory display corresponding to the memory is updated, and the display of the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b is also updated. At this time, the start memory is generated in the state where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed instead of the execution of the specific effect, and the update is performed when the display of the first hold display unit 83 is restarted. Therefore, the highlighting as shown in FIGS. 61 (c) and 61 (e) is not performed.

Such a highlighting setting is a scenario for performing an update effect when the start memory increases in the special figure 1 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 52 and the special figure 2 hold information setting process (not shown). As a table, it can be realized by selecting an appropriate scenario table from the occurrence timing of the start memory and the presence / absence of display of the first hold display unit 83.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory of the variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41 is provided, and the start memory display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) as a hold display. The second hold display (second hold display unit 86) can be displayed, the second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable display game, and the first hold display is during the execution of a predetermined specific effect. Is configured to be hidden, and when a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the first hold is displayed. Regarding the display, when the specific effect is completed and the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated according to the occurrence of a new start memory, and the start memory is generated in the second hold display. When the display is updated accordingly, the display is updated in a different manner depending on whether or not the specific effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the occurrence of the start memory can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and can execute the variable display game. Among them, the second hold display is continuously displayed, the first hold display is hidden during the execution of the predetermined specific effect, and a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect. In that case, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, and the display of the first hold display is new when the specific effect is completed and the display of the first hold display is resumed. It is configured to update the display when the start memory occurs, and when the display is updated due to the occurrence of the start memory in the first hold display, it may be updated when the display is restarted or not in a different manner. It means that the display is updated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the occurrence of start memory when the first hold display is hidden can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, when the start memory display means updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory in the first hold display, and if it is an update when the display is restarted, a new start occurs during the execution of the specific effect. This means that the start memory display corresponding to the memory is displayed in a mode different from that of other start memory displays. Therefore, the start memory generated when the first hold display is hidden can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

It should be noted that the configuration of this modification is changed when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83, which is the configuration of the first modification described above, is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. FIG. 62 shows an example of the effect in this case. The progress of the effect is the same as the effect when the pseudo-continuous variation display mode shown in FIG. 61 is executed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the first hold display unit 83 is hidden because the sub display device 49 is located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. When the start memory is generated in, the second hold display unit 86 highlights the image. Further, as shown in FIG. 62E, the display is not displayed in the first hold display unit 83 in which the display is resumed based on the evacuation of the sub display device 49 from the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. The decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory that occurred during the period is highlighted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (g), the sub-display device 49 is not located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed, and the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. No highlighting is performed when start-up memory occurs.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory of the variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the indicated hold display on the display device 41, and an effect device (sub display device) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. 49), and the start storage display means can display a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as hold displays. During the execution of the variable display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device. If a new start memory occurs while the display is hidden, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the hidden state for the first hold display ends. Then, when the display of the first hold display is resumed, the display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, and when the display is updated with the occurrence of the start memory in the second hold display. , The display is updated in a different manner depending on whether or not the first hold display is in the hidden state. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the occurrence of the start memory can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a display device 41 capable of displaying information about the game and a start winning area are provided. Variable display based on the winning of the game ball A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the execution right of the game as a start memory, and a hold display showing information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. The start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the information on the display device 41, and the effect device (sub display device 49) capable of operating and overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. The start memory display means can display a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as hold displays, and is a variable display game. The second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device, and the first hold display is not displayed. If a new start memory is generated during the display, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the display of the first hold display is resumed for the first hold display. Is it an update when the display is restarted when the display is updated due to the occurrence of the start memory in the first hold display, which is configured to update the display when a new start memory is generated? It means that the display is updated in a different manner depending on whether or not it is. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the occurrence of start memory when the first hold display is hidden can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, when the start memory display means updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory in the first hold display, and when the update is for resuming the display, when the first hold display is hidden. The start memory display corresponding to the generated new start memory is displayed in a mode different from that of other start memory displays. Therefore, the start memory generated when the first hold display is hidden can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the mode of updating the hold display differs depending on the time when the start memory is generated and the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect.

FIG. 63 shows an example of an effect in which the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is executed. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas to reach the reach state, the reach effect is one of the predetermined specific effects as shown in FIG. 63 (b). The display starts. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the pseudo-continuous effect display which forms one of the predetermined specific effects indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation display mode is started is started. Even during the execution of this pseudo continuous effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden. The display of the second hold display unit 86 is continued.

When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is updated as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Will be done. At this time, since the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed and the pre-reading notice effect for the start memory is performed, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the display mode emphasizes the update of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a. Here, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a is made larger than usual to be emphasized. The highlighting (suggestion notification) may be in another mode, and examples thereof include changing the display color and blinking display. This highlighting is performed for a certain period of time, and then returns to the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the pseudo continuous effect display ends, and the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area. Then, the display of "ream" indicating that there is a re-variation in the medium fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped, and the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas are temporarily stopped. Further, with the end of the pseudo continuous effect display, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 is resumed. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect.

At this time, a hold change notice is performed, which is a start memory generated during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed, and is a look-ahead notice effect for the start memory. Therefore, in order to notify the player to that effect in an easy-to-understand manner, the display mode emphasizes the update of the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a. Here, the display of the corresponding decorative start memory display on the first special figure 1 hold display unit 86a is made larger than usual to be emphasized. The highlighting may be in other modes, such as changing the display color or blinking the display. Further, the display timing of the target decoration start memory display may be delayed from the display timing of the first hold display unit 83. This highlighting is performed for a certain period of time, and then returns to the normal display mode as shown in FIG. 63 (f).

Further, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated as a new start memory when the specific effect is not being executed, the special figure 2 start generated in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b as shown in FIG. 63 (g). The display of the decorative start memory display corresponding to the memory is immediately updated, and the display of the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b is also immediately updated. At this time, since the start memory is generated in the state where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed instead of the execution of the specific effect, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not performed or not, as shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (e). No such highlighting is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (h), the reach effect display that forms one of the specific effects is started, and further, as shown in FIG. 13 (i), the pseudo continuous effect display that forms one of the specific effects is started. To. When the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the display of the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a of the second hold display unit 86 is updated as shown in FIG. 63 (i). Will be done. At this time, although the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed, it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect for the start memory is not performed, so FIG. 63 (c) No highlighting is done as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (j), the pseudo continuous effect display ends, and the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 resumes. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect. At this time, although the start memory is generated during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is hidden while the specific effect is being executed, the hold change notice, which is the look-ahead notice effect for the start memory, is not performed. Therefore, the highlighting as shown in FIG. 63 (e) is not performed.

Such a highlighting setting is a scenario for performing an update effect when the start memory increases in the special figure 1 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 52 and the special figure 2 hold information setting process (not shown). This can be achieved by selecting an appropriate scenario table as the table. Here, an appropriate scenario table is selected based on the occurrence timing of the start memory, the presence / absence of the display of the first hold display unit 83, and whether the execution of the hold change notice, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is determined in the look-ahead variation command processing. To do so.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), even when a start memory for performing the look-ahead notice effect occurs while the first hold display unit 83 is displayed instead of executing the specific effect, FIG. 63 (c) And (e) may be highlighted. Further, although the highlighting shown in FIG. 63 (c) is performed when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, it may be suggested that the pre-reading notice effect is executed. That is, even if the pre-reading notice effect is not started at the stage of FIG. 63 (e), the highlighting of FIG. 63 (c) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

Further, the highlighting mode shown in FIGS. 63 (c) and 63 (e) is when the start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect shown in FIGS. 61 (c) and 61 (e) in the fourth modification. Although the same as the highlighting mode, these may be set as separate modes so that both highlighting can be performed. Further, even when the pre-reading notice effect is started at a timing later than the timing at which the display of the first hold display unit 83 is resumed as in the third modification, the emphasis in FIG. 63 (c) occurs when the start memory occurs. It may be displayed. In addition, highlighting such as the fourth modification example and the fifth modification example may be performed only when a part of the specific effects are executed. For example, the highlighting may not be performed during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect display, and the highlighting may be performed in other specific effects. Further, when the effect during the special game state is set as a specific effect, the highlighting may not be performed in the specific effect during the special game state. Further, the highlighting (suggestion notification) such as the fourth modification and the fifth modification is not limited to that performed by the first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86, and other display areas, lamps, and LEDs. It may be done by voice or by voice.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Regarding the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store the execution right of the variable display game together with the random number up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the start memory stored in the start storage means. A variable display game based on the start memory is executed with the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display indicating information on the display device 41 and the random numbers stored as the start memory in the start memory means. A pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining before is provided, and the start memory display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display) as hold displays. 2 Hold display unit 86) can be displayed, the second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable display game, and the first hold display is hidden during the execution of a predetermined specific effect. When a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the specific effect is displayed for the first hold display. It is configured to update the display accompanying the occurrence of a new start memory when the display of the first hold display is resumed after termination, and a preliminary determination of the new start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is made. When the determination result is notified by the means in the first hold display in which the display is resumed after the end of the specific effect, the advance determination is made when the display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory in the second hold display. It means that the suggestion notification suggesting that the determination result is notified by the means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, it can be suggested that the determination result is notified by the advance determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the configuration of this modification is changed when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83, which is the configuration of the first modification described above, is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. FIG. 64 shows an example of the effect in this case. The progress of the effect is the same as the effect when the pseudo-continuous variation display mode shown in FIG. 63 is executed.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the first hold display unit 83 is hidden because the sub display device 49 is located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. When the start memory is generated in the above, if the pre-reading notice effect is performed for the start memory, the second hold display unit 86 highlights the start memory when the start memory is generated. Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the display is not displayed in the first hold display unit 83 in which the display is resumed based on the evacuation of the sub display device 49 from the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. The decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory that occurs during the above period and the pre-reading notice effect is performed is highlighted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), the sub display device 49 is not located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed, and the first hold display unit 83 is newly displayed. When a start memory is generated, the first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86 do not perform highlighting. Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (i), the first hold display unit 83 is hidden because the sub display device 49 is located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. Even when the start memory is generated in the above, if the pre-reading notice effect is not performed for the start memory, the second hold display unit 86 does not highlight the start memory when the start memory is generated.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store the execution right of the variable display game together with a random number up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and a start memory stored in the start storage means. A variable display game based on the start memory is executed with the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display indicating the information regarding the start memory and the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means. A pre-determination means (game control device 100) that determines before the memory, and an effect device (sub-display device 49) that can be operated and can be overlapped with the front surface of the display device 41. The start memory display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and execute the variable display game. Among them, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, the first hold display is configured to be hidden when it overlaps with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden. If a new start memory occurs at a certain time, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory, and the hidden state of the first hold display ends and the first hold display is concerned. Preliminary means for determining a new start memory that occurs when the first hold display is hidden, which is configured to update the display when a new start memory is generated when the hold display is resumed. When the determination result is notified by the first hold display in which the display is resumed after the end of the non-display state, the display is updated in advance when a new start memory is generated in the second hold display. It means that the suggestion notification suggesting that the determination result is notified by the determination means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, it can be suggested that the determination result is notified by the advance determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modified example has a different display mode of the second hold display unit 86.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65A, the second hold display unit 86 has the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a for displaying the number of special figure 1 start memories, and the special figure 2 start memory number. It is assumed that the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b is provided, but as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the second special figure 2 start display unit 86 has the total number of the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory. It may be possible to have only the total number display unit 86c for displaying. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the second hold display unit 86 includes the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a, the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b, the special figure 1 start memory, and the special figure 2 start. The total number display unit 86c for displaying the total number of memories may be provided.

Further, the display mode of the second hold display unit 86 shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) may be switched based on the switching conditions such as the gaming state and the effect state. The switching conditions include whether or not a specific effect is being executed, a probability state that results in a special result, an operating state of the normal variable winning device 37, whether or not it is in a reach state, and whether or not the number of start memories has reached a predetermined number. Arbitrary conditions such as whether or not can be set.

For example, during the execution of the specific effect, only the total number display unit 86c may be displayed so as not to interfere with the effect display as shown in FIG. 65 (b). Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal operation state, since the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory are generated almost alternately, only the total number display unit 86c is displayed and the time saving operation state is performed. Since the frequency of occurrence of the special figure 2 start memory increases, the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a and the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b are displayed as shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (c). Is also good. When the display mode of the second hold display unit 86 is switched based on the switching conditions such as the gaming state and the effect state, it can be realized by setting a scenario table that defines the display and non-display of each item.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory of the variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. A start memory display means capable of displaying the hold display to be shown on the display device 41 is provided, and the start winning area includes a first start winning area (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting winning area (second starting). There are a winning opening 97 and a normal variable winning device 37), and the starting memory means can store the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) as the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning area. Yes, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) can be stored as the start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area, and the start memory display means is the first hold display (hold display). The first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) can be displayed, and in the second hold display, the total number of the first start memory and the second start memory. Is configured to be displayed, the second hold display is continuously displayed during the execution of the variable display game, and the first hold display is hidden during the execution of a predetermined specific effect. When a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the specific effect is completed for the first hold display. 1 When the display of the hold display is resumed, the display is updated when a new start memory is generated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, in the second hold display, the total number of the number of the first start memory and the number of the second start memory is displayed, so that the number of start memory can be easily grasped.

Further, the start memory display means also displays the number of the first start memory and the number of the second start memory in the second hold display. Therefore, all the information regarding the start storage number can be grasped by the second hold display.

Further, in the first hold display, the start memory display means displays information related to the start memory by displaying a start memory display corresponding to each start memory on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, during the period in which the first hold display is displayed, information about each start memory can be notified.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 (d) to 65 (f), when the number of start storages exceeds a certain number, highlighting may be performed by the second hold display unit 86. Here, the display of the second hold display unit 86 is made larger than usual to be emphasized. The highlighting may be in other modes, such as changing the display color or blinking the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), only the total number display unit 86c may be highlighted.

The number of start storages for highlighting can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second special figure 1 hold display unit 86a and the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b perform highlighting when the value is 3 or more. The total number display unit 86c highlights when the value is 6 or more. Further, whether or not the highlighting shown in FIGS. 65 (d) to 65 (f) is executed may be determined based on the execution conditions such as the game state and the effect state. As the execution condition, any condition can be set, such as whether or not the specific effect is being executed, whether or not it is in the probability state and reach state, and whether or not the number of start memories has reached a predetermined number. When the display mode of the second hold display unit 86 is changed based on the execution conditions such as the game state and the effect state, it is highlighted based on the execution conditions as an object that is a display of each item of the second hold display unit 86. This can be achieved by choosing between the ones that are and the ones that are not.

In this way, by highlighting when the number of start memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of overflow prizes, which are start prizes that occur when the start memory is the upper limit value, and cause a loss to the player. It is possible not to give a feeling of being sick. In particular, since only the second hold display unit 86 is displayed during the execution of the specific effect, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the state of the start memory number by performing such highlighting. From the above, the effect control device 300 is configured to perform a specific notification when the number of start storages exceeds a predetermined number. Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to perform a specific notification when the total number of the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory exceeds a predetermined number.

It should be noted that the configuration of this modification is changed when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83, which is the configuration of the first modification described above, is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. In this case, the second hold display unit 86 continues even when the first hold display unit 83 is hidden because the sub display device 49 is located in front of the area where the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. The second hold display unit 86 can display the total number of the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory. In addition, highlighting is performed when the number of start-up memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

Based on the above, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is provided. A display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game and a start-up prize in a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Information on the start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number as the start memory of the variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball to the area, and the information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. It is provided with a start memory display means capable of displaying the hold display to be shown on the display device 41, and an effect device (sub display device 49) capable of operating and being able to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. The start winning area includes a first starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36) and a second starting winning area (second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). The first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) can be stored as a start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the first start winning area, and the first start memory is stored as the start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning area. 2 Start memory (special figure 2 start memory) can be stored, and the start memory display means has a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a second hold display (second hold display unit) as hold displays. 86) can be displayed, and in the second hold display, the total number of the number of the first start memory and the number of the second start memory is displayed, and the second hold is held during the execution of the variable display game. The display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, the first hold display is configured to be hidden when it overlaps with the effect device, and a new start is made when the first hold display is hidden. When memory occurs, the display of the second hold display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, the hidden state of the first hold display ends, and the display of the first hold display resumes. This means that the display is updated when a new start memory is generated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, in the second hold display, the total number of the number of the first start memory and the number of the second start memory is displayed, so that the number of start memory can be easily grasped.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example can notify the state of the normal variable winning device 37.

As shown in FIG. 66A, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the second hold display unit 86 can execute the normal figure hold display 86d corresponding to the normal figure start memory. Here, it is shown that the number of reserved figures is 0. Further, in the time-saving operation state, when the normal figure start memory is 0 and the normal figure hit state is reached, the end time notification 87 for notifying the end timing of the normal figure hit state can be executed. Here, it is notified that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed after the normal figure hitting state ends with 30 seconds remaining.

In the short-time operation state, there is a high possibility that the result of the normal fluctuation display game will be a hit, and if the normal fluctuation start memory is not interrupted, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 will be opened regularly and the player will hardly reduce the number of balls held. You can play games. However, if the normal drawing start memory does not occur, the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is interrupted, which is disadvantageous for the player. The end time notification 87 notifies that the occurrence of such a disadvantageous state for the player is near, and prompts the player to generate the normal drawing start memory. As shown in FIG. 66B, the end time notification 87 can be executed even during the execution of the specific effect. Further, the remaining time may be indicated by a value other than a numerical value, such as a graph display as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

[Gate switch monitoring process]
In order to notify the end time as described above, the gate switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 67 is performed instead of the gate switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 33. In this gate switch monitoring process, when the number of reserved figures is updated by +1 (step B103), a command for the number of reserved figures is prepared (step B121), and an effect command setting process is performed (step B121). B122). As a result, information regarding the increase in the normal drawing start memory is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Usually processing]
Further, instead of the normal drawing normal processing shown in FIG. 35, the normal drawing normal processing shown in FIG. 68 is performed. In this normal figure holding number, when the normal figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B320), the normal figure holding number command corresponding to the normal figure holding number is prepared (step B131), and the effect command setting process is performed (step B131). Step B132). As a result, information regarding the decrease in the normal drawing start memory is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Processing during display of general map]
Further, instead of the process during display of the normal map shown in FIG. 36, the process during display of the normal map shown in FIG. 69 is performed. In this normal map display processing, when a hit occurs during normal power support (during time saving operation) (step B504; Y), a normal map hit command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is prepared (step B141). , The effect command setting process is performed (step B142). As a result, information indicating that the effect has been hit and the type of hit is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Single-shot command processing]
Further, instead of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 51, the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed. In this one-shot command processing, MODE determines whether the command is in the range of the normal map system, that is, whether the received command is the normal figure hold number command or the normal figure per command (step C331). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the normal map system (step C331; Y), the normal map information setting process (step C332) for processing information related to the normal map is performed, and the single-shot command process is terminated. .. When it is determined that the MODE is not in the range of the normal diagram system (step C331; N), processing for another MODE (not shown) is performed.

[Public map information setting process]
FIG. 71 shows the general map information setting process (step C332) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process. In this normal map information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal map hold number command has been received (step C341). If the normal figure hold number command has not been received (step C341; N), the process proceeds to step C343. Further, when the normal figure hold number command is received (step C341; Y), the command value is set in the normal figure hold number grasped by the effect control device 300 (step C342), and is the normal figure per command received? Is determined (step C343).

If the command for hitting the normal map has not been received (step C343; N), the normal figure information setting process ends. Further, when the command for hitting the normal figure is received (step C343; Y), it is determined whether or not the operation time is shortened (step C344). Then, when the operation time is not shortened (step C344; N), the normal map information setting process is terminated. Further, in the case of the time saving operation state (step C344; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (step C345). If the number of reserved normal figures is not 0 (step C345; N), the normal figure information setting process ends. When the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (step C345; Y), the time of the hit state is acquired based on the command for hitting the normal figure (step C346), the end time notification is set (step C347), and the normal figure is held. The figure information setting process ends. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an end notification means capable of notifying the end timing of the hit state.

Although the end time notification 87 is performed when the operation time is shortened, it may be performed when the operation state is normal. Further, although it is assumed that the operation is performed when the number of memory for starting the normal figure is 0, it may be performed even when the number is not 0. In addition, although it is said that it is performed even during the execution of the specific effect, it may not be performed. Further, the normal figure hold number display 86d on the second hold display unit 86 may be performed only when the time saving operation state is performed.

Based on the above, a special figure variable display that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). In a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the game is executed and the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result, it is difficult to win a prize in the start winning area. A normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a state and an open state that makes it easier to win a prize than the closed state, and the execution right of the normal figure change display game based on the detection of a game ball in a predetermined area as a normal figure start memory. The normal fluctuation start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit, and the hit state that converts the normal fluctuation winning device 37 into the open state based on the result of the normal fluctuation display game being a specific result. The game control device 100 and the end notification means (effect control device 300) capable of notifying the end timing of the hit state are provided. Therefore, since the player can know the end timing of the hit state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the end notification means can notify the end timing of the hit state when the number of normal figure start memories is 0. Therefore, since the player can know that the game is in the final hit state before the game is interrupted, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, an operating state setting means (game) for setting the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to either a normal operating state or a time-saving operating state in which the opening state per unit time is longer than the normal operating state. The control device 100) is provided, and the end notification means can notify the end timing of the hit state when the operation time is shortened. Therefore, since it is possible to know the end timing of the hit state in a time-saving operation state that is advantageous for the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a display device 41 capable of displaying information related to the game and a start storage means (game) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of execution rights of the special figure variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area. The start memory display means includes a control device 100) and a start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a hold display indicating information about the start memory stored in the start storage means on the display device 41. As the hold display, the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) can be displayed, and the second hold is held during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The display is continuously displayed, the first hold display is configured to be hidden during the execution of a predetermined specific effect, and when a new start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect, the second display is displayed. The hold display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, and the first hold display is accompanied by the occurrence of a new start memory when the specific effect ends and the display of the first hold display is resumed. The display is updated, and the end notification means is set to perform notification even during the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the status of the special figure start memory so that the player is not inconvenienced. In addition, it is possible to always notify the information of the hit state of the normal figure, which affects the ease of generation of the special figure start memory.

It should be noted that the configuration of this modification is changed when the sub display device 49 forming the effect device overlaps the front side of the area where the first hold display unit 83, which is the configuration of the first modification described above, is displayed. It is also possible to apply it to a configuration in which the hold display unit 83 is hidden. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (d) and 66 (f), the area where the end time notification 87 is displayed is set to a position where the sub display device 49 is not covered even if the sub display device 49 operates, or FIG. 66 (b). When the area is covered when the sub display device 49 operates as shown in FIG. 66 (e), the end time is notified to a position that is not covered by the operation of the sub display device 49 as shown in FIG. 66 (e). Make 87 move.

Based on the above, a special figure variable display that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37). Display device 41 capable of displaying information related to a game in a game machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game is executed and the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result. The start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number of execution rights of the special figure variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area and the start storage means. It is possible to operate with the start memory display means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the hold display indicating the information regarding the start memory on the display device 41, and it is possible to be in a state of overlapping the front surface of the display device 41. An effect device (sub display device 49), a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize in the starting winning area and an open state in which winning is easier than the closed state, and a predetermined area. Based on the detection of the game ball, the execution right of the normal fluctuation display game can be stored as the normal fluctuation display game up to a predetermined upper limit number (game control device 100), and the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a specific result. A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that generates a hit state that converts the normal variable winning device 37 into an open state, and an end notification means (effect control device) that can notify the end timing of the hit state. 300), and the start storage display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display. During the execution of the special figure variation display game, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the effect device, and the first hold display is hidden when it overlaps with the effect device. 1 If a new start memory is generated while the hold display is hidden, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the first hold display is the first hold. When the display of the display is resumed, the display is updated when a new start memory is generated, and the end notification means notifies the display at a position that does not overlap with the effect device even when the first hold display is hidden. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, it is possible to always notify the information of the hit state of the normal figure, which affects the ease of generation of the special figure start memory. Further, since the player can know the end timing of the hit state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the display mode of the hold display differs depending on the probability state.

FIG. 72 shows a display mode in a low probability state. As shown in FIG. 72A, the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the sub display device 49. Then, when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 72 (b) and reaches the reach state, one of the predetermined specific effects is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (c). The reach effect display is started. As for the reach effect display here, the background display showing the model name "CR Tora" is displayed on the display device 41, and the background showing the model name "CR Tora" is also displayed on the sub display device 49. The display is what is displayed. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41. Further, although the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 of the sub display device 49 is hidden, the display of the second hold display unit 86 on the display device 41 is continued.

Further, the reach state is developed, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d), the SP3 reach effect display, which is one of the predetermined specific effects, is started. In this SP3 reach effect display, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 49 perform an effect display in which a character appears. Even during the execution of this SP3 reach effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, and the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 83 of the sub display device 49 are displayed. The display of 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 on the display device 41 is continued.

Then, when the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of this specific effect, the second special figure of the second hold display unit 86 displayed on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 72 (d). 1 The display of the hold display unit 86a is updated. Further, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b of the second hold display unit 86 is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (e). Will be updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (f), when the specific effect is completed, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Further, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is restarted in the sub display device 49. At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect, and the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is updated. In, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is updated to be displayed. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a hold change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to these new start memories. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b. Is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and the pre-reading result is suggested.

FIG. 73 shows a display mode in a high probability state. As shown in FIG. 73A, the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the display device 41. Then, as shown in FIG. 73B, when the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and reaches the reach state, the sub display device 49 moves upward and the first hold display of the display device 41 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), the reach effect display that forms one of the predetermined specific effects is the display device 41 and the sub display device. It starts at 49.

As for the reach effect display here, the background display showing the model name "CR Tora" is displayed on the display device 41, and the background showing the model name "CR Tora" is also displayed on the sub display device 49. The display is what is displayed. At this time, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41. Further, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 of the display device 41 is hidden when the sub display device 49 is overlapped on the front side, but the display device 41 is the first display device 41. 2 The display of the hold display unit 86 is continued.

Further, the reach state is developed, and as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the SP3 reach effect display, which is one of the predetermined specific effects, is started. In this SP3 reach effect display, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 49 perform an effect display in which a character appears. Even during the execution of this SP3 reach effect display, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed small in the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, and the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 83 of the sub display device 49 are displayed. The display of 84 is hidden, and the display of the second hold display unit 86 on the display device 41 is continued.

Then, when the special figure 1 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of the specific effect, the second special figure of the second hold display unit 86 displayed on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 73 (d). 1 The display of the hold display unit 86a is updated. Further, when the special figure 2 start memory is generated as a new start memory during the execution of the specific effect, the display of the second special figure 2 hold display unit 86b of the second hold display unit 86 is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (e). Will be updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), when the specific effect is completed, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 41. Further, the sub display device 49 operates downward to return to the initial position, and retracts from the front side of the portion where the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 of the display device 41 are displayed. Along with this, the display of the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 is restarted in the display device 41.

At this time, the first hold display unit 83 updates the display with the occurrence of the start memory during the execution of the specific effect. Here, the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a is updated to display the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect, and the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b is updated. In, the decorative start memory display corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect is updated to be displayed. In addition, with this update, it is possible to start a hold change notice that suggests a look-ahead result corresponding to these new start memories. Here, the third decorative start memory display from the left in the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b. Is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and the pre-reading result is suggested.

In the low probability state, it is unlikely that a special result will be obtained, so it is necessary to enhance the interest of the production and motivate the player to continue the game. Therefore, the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the sub display device 49 so that the display area of the display device 41 for displaying the special figure variation display game can be widely used, and various effect displays are displayed. We are trying to enhance the interest of the game by making it possible to perform effectively.

On the other hand, in the high probability state, there is more interest in when the next special result is derived than in the production content. In addition, the execution time of the special figure variation display game is shortened, and the digestion speed of the start memory becomes faster. Therefore, the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 that displays the result, the first hold display unit 83 that displays the start memory information, and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the same display device 41 and brought close to each other. It is displayed and the amount of movement of the viewpoint between the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 and the first hold display unit 83 is reduced so that the player can easily grasp the progress of the special figure variable display game. ..

In this way, regarding whether to display the first hold display unit 83 or the running hold display unit 84 on the display device 41 or the sub display device 49, a scenario table for displaying these is set based on the probability state. It can be realized by doing. In addition, display and non-display can be realized by setting a scenario table including display and non-display information at the start of the special figure variation display game. Although the reach effect display and the SP3 reach effect display are mentioned here as the specific effects, the first hold display unit 83 and the executing are also in the case of other specific effects such as the pseudo continuous effect display shown in FIG. 42 and the like. The hold display unit 84 is hidden.

Based on the above, a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37). A first display device (display device) capable of displaying a variable display game on a game machine that generates a special game that is executed and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. 41), a second display device (sub display device 49) capable of displaying information related to the game, and a variable display game execution right based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area is stored up to a predetermined upper limit as starting memory. A possible start storage means (game control device 100) and a hold display (first hold display unit 83, second hold display unit 86) indicating information about start storage stored in the start storage means are displayed on the first display device or the first display device. 2 The start memory display means (effect control device 300) that can be displayed on the display device and the probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result are divided into a low probability state and a high probability state higher than the low probability state. A probability setting means (game control device 100) to be set in any of the above is provided, and the start memory display means displays a hold display on the second display device in the low probability state and the first display device in the high probability state. It means that the hold display is displayed in.

Therefore, in the low probability state, the first display device can effectively produce the variable display game, the fun of the game can be improved, and the second display device can always grasp the status of the start memory. It is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, in the high probability state, the next special result is expected to occur, and the interest of the game can be improved by making it possible to grasp the state of the start memory and the state of the variable display game at a glance.

Further, the start storage display means can display the first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and the second hold display (second hold display unit 86) as the hold display, and the first hold display is In the low probability state, it is displayed on the second display device, in the high probability state, it is displayed on the first display device, and the second hold display is displayed on the first display device regardless of the probability state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced. In addition, the second hold display, which is always displayed, can be prevented from interfering with other effect displays.

Further, the start memory display means continuously displays the second hold display during the execution of the variable display game, hides the first hold display when executing a predetermined specific effect, and hides the specific effect. When a new start memory is generated during execution, the display is updated with the occurrence of the new start memory for the second hold display, and the specific effect is completed for the first hold display and the first hold display is concerned. When the display of is restarted, the display is updated when a new start memory is generated. Therefore, it is possible to always grasp the state of the start memory and prevent the player from being inconvenienced.

Further, the start memory display means shows information about the start memory by displaying a start memory display corresponding to each start memory on a one-to-one basis in the first hold display, and displays the number of start memories in the second hold display. By displaying it, the information about the start memory is shown. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second hold display, which is always displayed, from interfering with other effect displays.

Further, based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning device 37), a variable display game for displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed. A first display device (display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game in a game machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The second display device (sub display device 49), which can display information about the game and can operate and can be overlapped with the front surface of the first display device, and the game to the start winning area. Variable display based on the winning of a ball A start storage means (game control device 100) that can store up to a predetermined upper limit of the execution right of the game as a start memory, and a hold display showing information on the start memory stored in the start storage means. The start memory display means (effect control device 300) that can be displayed on the first display device or the second display device, and the probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result are set to a low probability state and a lower probability state than the low probability state. A probability setting means (game control device 100) for setting one of the high probability states is provided, and the start memory display means includes a first hold display (first hold display unit 83) and a first hold display as hold display. 2 Hold display (second hold display unit 86) can be displayed, and the first hold display is displayed on the second display device in the low probability state and displayed on the first display device in the high probability state. The second hold display is configured to be displayed on the first display device regardless of the probability state, and in the high probability state, the second hold display is continuously displayed at a position that does not overlap with the second display device, and the second hold display is displayed. 1 The hold display is configured to be hidden when it overlaps with the second display device, and when a new start memory occurs while the first hold display is hidden, the second hold display is changed. The display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory, and for the first hold display, the display is updated with the occurrence of a new start memory when the display of the first hold display is resumed. Become.

Therefore, in the low probability state, the first display device can effectively produce the variable display game, the fun of the game can be improved, and the second display device can always grasp the status of the start memory. It is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenienced. Further, in the high probability state, the next special result is expected to occur, and the interest of the game can be improved by making it possible to grasp the state of the start memory and the state of the variable display game at a glance.

The display devices that display the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are different in the low probability state and the high probability state, but in the high probability state, the special figure variation display game is performed more than in the low probability state. Any display may be sufficient as long as the display and the display of the start memory are displayed so as to be close to each other. For example, the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the display device 41 in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the special figure variation display game is displayed rather than in the low-probability state. And the display of the start memory may be displayed so as to be close to each other. Further, in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state, the first hold display unit 83 and the running hold display unit 84 are displayed on the sub-display device 49, but in the high-probability state, the special figure variation display game is performed more than in the low-probability state. The display position on the sub-display device 49 may be different, or the arrangement position of the sub-display device 49 itself may be different so that the display and the display of the start memory are displayed close to each other.

In the first embodiment and each modification shown above, the game machine that digests the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory in the order of occurrence has been described, but the special figure 2 start memory is more than the special figure 1 start memory. It may be a game machine that preferentially digests. Further, the game machine may be a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory.

Further, the specific effect of hiding the first hold display unit 83 is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the production during the special gaming state may be a specific production, or only a part of the production during the special gaming state may be a specific production. Of the fanfare production, ending production, round production, interval production, and round continuation production. Any production may be a specific production. Further, the effect during the special gaming state based on a part of the big hit type and the small hit type may be used as a specific effect.

In addition, a cut-in effect that cuts in an image or character during variable display, and a step-up effect that suggests a high possibility of a special result depending on the stage where the image or character appears and progresses in stages, etc. It may be a specific production. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, the revariation display effect may be a specific effect in which the revariation display is performed after temporarily stopping in the special result mode to derive the final special result mode.

Further, although the first hold display unit 83 and the execution hold display unit 84 are hidden during the execution of the specific effect, they may be temporarily displayed at a predetermined timing. For example, it may be displayed temporarily at predetermined time intervals, or it may be displayed temporarily when the start memory is generated. Further, the hold change notice may be started while the first hold display unit 83 is hidden, and may be temporarily displayed at the start of the hold change notice during the non-display. Further, the display mode of the execution hold display unit 84 may be changed while the execution hold display unit 84 is hidden, and may be temporarily displayed when the display mode is changed during the non-display. Further, if an error state has occurred in the game machine, it may be displayed.

Further, while the specific effect is being executed, both the first special figure 1 hold display unit 83a and the first special figure 2 hold display unit 83b are hidden, but only one of them may be hidden. .. Further, although the second hold display unit 86 is always displayed, it may be hidden during the period when the first hold display unit 83 is displayed. Further, both the first hold display unit 83 and the second hold display unit 86 may be hidden. In this case, when the start memory occurs, the second hold display unit 86 may be temporarily displayed to indicate the occurrence of the start memory to the player.

Further, when the start memory is generated while the first hold display unit 83 is hidden and the display is updated when the first hold display unit 83 is redisplayed, there is a start memory generated during the non-display. You may try to emphasize that. For example, the display timing of the decorative start memory display corresponding to the start memory generated during non-display may be delayed from the display timing of the first hold display unit 83.

Further, the above-described first embodiment and the configurations of the respective modifications can be applied in any combination. When the configuration of the start timing of the notification of the preliminary determination result of the first embodiment and the configuration of the start timing of the notification of the determination result by the preliminary determination means of the third modification are combined, is the specific effect being executed? Arbitrary conditions such as whether or not, the probability state of a special result, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37, whether or not it is in the reach state, whether or not the number of start memories has reached a predetermined number, and the lottery result of the start timing Which start timing should be selected depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied. In addition, when there is a possibility that a contradiction may occur by simply combining the first embodiment and the second modified example, the fourth modified example and the fifth modified example, etc., it depends on whether or not such an arbitrary condition is satisfied. Select which configuration to use.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all game machines that use the game ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 36 1st start winning opening (starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (starting winning area)
41 Display device 49 Sub display device (directing device)
83 1st hold display section (1st hold display)
86 Second hold display (second hold display)
97 2nd start winning opening (starting winning area)
100 Game control device (starting storage means)
300 effect control device (starting memory display means)

Claims (1)

Based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area, a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In a game machine that generates a special game to be granted
A display device that can display information about the game,
A start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of execution rights of the variable display game as start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area.
A start storage display means capable of displaying a first hold display and a second hold display indicating information about the start memory stored in the start storage means on the display device, and
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to change the display mode of the first hold display to a specific display mode different from the normal display mode is provided.
The start memory display means continuously displays the second hold display during the execution of the variable display game, and executes the first hold display intermittently and a plurality of times to execute a predetermined specific effect. Configured to hide inside,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect that starts after a specific period in which the first specific effect is completed and the first hold display is redisplayed.
Said first hold display of a display mode corresponding to the new start memory occurring in the specific period can be displayed the first hold display is the second specific effect is completed following the variable display game is executed A game machine characterized in that the normal display mode is changed to the specific display mode at the time of the game.

Images